Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

loqelmelp=udmäìë=ap=L=`ÉéÜ
loqelmelp=ud=R=ap=L=`ÉéÜ
loqelmelp=ud=P=ap
pÉêîáÅÉ=j~åì~ä
båÖäáëÜ
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS
Easypad
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE DS
P1
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Multipad
sÉêëáçå=NPKM
About the Service Manual:
• This Service Manual is valid for the following unit versions:

– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS*
i NOTE
These two system versions differ regarding the equipment offered by their user interfaces and their
possible configuration levels (see page 1-5).
i NOTE
Board DX41 is no longer installed in units with hardware version BA or higher (as of November 2006).
In addition, you also require:
• Spare parts list: Order No. 59 38 423

– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph,
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS
• Wiring diagrams: Order No. 59 38 332

– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph,
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS
• Installation Instructions
– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph: Order No. 59 87 651
– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph: Order No. 60 04 902
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS: Order No. 60 51 416
• Tools
– Screwdriver, medium sized
– Torx offset screwdrivers TX10, TX20, TX25
– Open-end wrench, 13 mm A/F
– Socket wrench, 13 mm A/F
– Side cutters
– Spirit level
• Auxiliary devices
– Digital multimeter, Accuracy Class 1
– Soldering tool for repairing cables
– Cable ties
– Teflon tape
– Loctite
General information/Software update 1
Messages 2
Troubleshooting 3
Adjustment 4
Service routines 5
Repair 6
Maintenance 7
Contents
1 General information ..................................................................... 1-5

1.1 Safety .................................................................................. 1-5
1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes ...................... 1-6
1.3 Programs and functions of the
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class ............................................ 1-8
1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class ........... 1-9
1.5 Operation notes ................................................................. 1-11
1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release ........... 1-13
1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ........................... 1-15
1.8 List of software versions .................................................... 1-16
1.9 Software update ................................................................ 1-22
1.10 Selecting More details ....................................................... 1-32
1.11 The most important modules and components ................. 1-34
1.12 Cabling overview ............................................................... 1-38
1.13 Illustrations of boards ........................................................ 1-42
1.14 Removing the covers ........................................................ 1-50
2 Messages .................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Help messages ................................................................... 2-4
2.2 System messages ............................................................... 2-6
2.3 Status displays .................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Error messages ................................................................... 2-6
2.5 List of error messages ......................................................... 2-9
2.6 List of available service routines ....................................... 2-62
3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3-3

3.1 Error logging memory .......................................................... 3-4
3.2 Check the CAN bus ............................................................. 3-6
3.3 Checking the boards ......................................................... 3-12
3.4 Checking the motors ......................................................... 3-14
3.5 Checking the light barriers ................................................ 3-15
3.6 Device leakage current too high ........................................ 3-16
3.7 Checking the cables .......................................................... 3-17
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path:
up to unit hardware revision AG
(with board DX41) ............................................................. 3-18
unit HW version BA or higher
(without board DX41) ........................................................ 3-22
3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images ........................... 3-25
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 V
Contents
4 Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-3

4.1 Important information concerning adjustment ...................... 4-3
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu .................................. 4-5
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit ...................................... 4-9
4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer
(XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) ..................................... 4-56
4.5 TSA sensor adjustment
(XGPlus full version only) .................................................. 4-107
4.6 Resetting the adjustment
(XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ..................................................... 4-115
5 Service routines ........................................................................... 5-9

5.1 Selecting the Service menu ............................................... 5-10
5.2 Selecting a service routine ................................................. 5-15
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS .......................................... 5-18
5.4 Service routine S001 ......................................................... 5-21
5.14 Service routine S018 ....................................................... 5-109
5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) .................................. 5-118
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................... 5-121
5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................... 5-130
59 38 399 D3352
VI D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Contents
6 Repair .......................................................................................... 6-5

6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle ...... 6-6
6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) ....................................... 6-14
6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) ............................. 6-17
6.4 Replacing the headrest ..................................................... 6-19
6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus)
or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ..................................... 6-21
6.6 Replacing the control panel ............................................... 6-24
6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) .............. 6-26
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer
laser module (PAN) ........................................................... 6-28
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) ............. 6-30
6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring
(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) ................................. 6-32
6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder) ................ 6-33
6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm
(for XGPlus / XG 5) ............................................................. 6-34
6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm
(only XG 3 / 3 PPE) ........................................................... 6-37
6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly .................................. 6-38
6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly) .................................... 6-42
6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder ........................... 6-43
6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder ..................................... 6-47
6.18 Replacing the sensor ........................................................ 6-48
6.19 Replacing the light barriers ............................................... 6-49
6.20 Replacing circuit boards .................................................... 6-59
6.21 Replacing cables ............................................................... 6-91
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 VII
Contents
7 Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-3

7.1 Checking the height adjustment .......................................... 7-4
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ....................... 7-6
7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ........................ 7-7
7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder) .................... 7-9
7.5 Checking the light localizers .............................................. 7-10
7.6 Checking the X-ray images ................................................ 7-12
7.7 Checking the tube data ...................................................... 7-13
7.8 Checking the diaphragm .................................................... 7-17
7.9 Checking the cables for damage ....................................... 7-35
7.10 Checking the idling rollers .................................................. 7-36
7.11 Checking the grounding straps .......................................... 7-37
7.12 Checking the cable shields ................................................ 7-38
7.13 Checking the protective ground wires ................................ 7-39
7.14 Checking the device leakage current ................................. 7-43
59 38 399 D3352
VIII D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
1General information
Tab 1
Contents
1.1 Safety ......................................................................1 – 5
1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes ..........1 – 6

1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system
classes and versions ............................................ 1 – 7

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class ................................1 – 8
1.3.1 XG 5 system version ............................................ 1 – 8
1.3.2 XG 3 system version ............................................ 1 – 8
1.3.3 XG 3 PPE (pay per exposure) system version..... 1 – 8
1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class1 – 9

1.4.1 Programs and functions of the basic version ....... 1 – 9
1.4.2 Programs and functions of the full version ......... 1 – 10
1.5 Operation notes.....................................................1 – 11
1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release1 – 13

1.6.1 Switching the demo mode ON............................ 1 – 14
1.6.2 Switching the demo mode OFF.......................... 1 – 14
1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ...............1 – 15
1.8 List of software versions........................................1 – 16

1.8.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE .................................. 1 – 16
1.8.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 .......................................... 1 – 17
1.8.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph ............................... 1 – 18
1.8.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph............................. 1 – 20
1.9 Software update ....................................................1 – 22

1.9.1 Important information on the software update.... 1 – 22
1.9.2 Permissible software updates ............................ 1 – 23
1.9.3 Performing a software update ............................ 1 – 24
1.9.4 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XG 5
to V02.30 or higher............................................. 1 – 29
1.9.5 Software Update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
from V02.20 to V02.30 or higher ........................ 1 – 30
1.9.6 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
from V02.22 to V02.30 or higher ........................ 1 – 31
1.10 Selecting More details ...........................................1 – 32
59 38 399 D3352
1–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1
1.11 The most important modules and components .....1 – 34

1.11.1 Slide ................................................................... 1 – 35
1.11.2 Stand .................................................................. 1 – 36
1.11.3 Cephalometer
(arm mounted on left side or on right side)......... 1 – 37
1.11.4 Remote control ................................................... 1 – 37
1.12 Cabling overview ...................................................1 – 38
1.13 Illustrations of boards ............................................1 – 42

1.13.1 Boards in the slide.............................................. 1 – 42
1.13.2 Boards in the stand ............................................ 1 – 46
1.13.3 Boards in the cephalometer
(arm mounted on right side or on left side)......... 1 – 47
1.13.4 Boards in the remote control .............................. 1 – 48
1.14 Removing the covers.............................................1 – 50
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1–3
Tab 1
59 38 399 D3352
1–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.1 Safety
1 General information
1.1
båÖäáëÜ
1.1 Safety
1.1
It is essential that you comply with the warning and safety information con-
tained in this Service Manual.
All such information is highlighted by one of three signal words, i.e. CAUTION,
WARNING or DANGER.
CAUTION
Nonobservance may result in minor physical injuries or material damage and
malfunctions.
WARNING
Nonobservance may lead to serious physical injury or death.
DANGER
Immediate danger to life and limb. Threat of serious physical injury or
death.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1–5
1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes Tab 1
1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes
Comfort class with Easypad (XGPlus) The XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system versions differ with regard to their
user interface. While the ORTHOPHOS XG (XGPlus) features a control panel
with a color touchscreen (Easypad), the (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) basic class is
equipped with a simpler control panel with a single-line display (Multipad).
Due to their different control panels, the operating procedures for these two
system classes also vary.
All ORTHOPHOS XG units are digital systems (DS).
The ORTHOPHOS XGPlus and XG 5 system versions are suitable for opera-
tion with a cephalometer (ceph). The cephalometer for the XGPlus system ver-
sion is also available with the ceph arm mounted either on the left or the right
side. Only the cephalometer version with the arm mounted on the left side is
offered for the XG 5 system version. Operation of the XG 3/3 PPE system ver-
Basic class with Multipad sion is not possible with a cephalometer.
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
i NOTE
The version with the ceph arm mounted on the left side is basically described
and illustrated in this Service Manual. Unless described separately, all dis-
mantling and assembly steps must be performed laterally reversed for the ver-
sion with the ceph arm mounted on the right side.
Prog. S kV mA
Remote control operation is possible in all system versions.

T R The (XGPlus) system class comes in a basic and a full version (see page 1-9),
however, the basic system class (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) is available only in a basic
version.
The XGPlus system class optionally includes TSA operation.
This Service Manual describes both system classes in the highest possible
configuration.
For more information on the different installation versions, please refer to the
Installation Instructions.
i NOTE
The empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are marked
with underscores in this Manual. They have been added to enhance clarity
and are not present on the real Multipad.
S005_______1____
( n
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
1–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes
1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system
1.2
classes and versions
båÖäáëÜ
Comfort class (Easypad, basic or full version, TSA option, remote control option)
1.2
with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XGPlus with ceph arm on right side
Basic class (Multipad, basic equipment, remote release optional)
Prog. S kV mA Prog. S kV mA
T R T R
with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XG 5
Prog. S kV mA Prog. S kV mA
T R T R
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1–7
1.3 Programs and functions of the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class Tab 1

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class
1.3.1 XG 5 system version
8 panoramic programs z P 1, P 1C, P 10

z P 1L, P 1R
z TM 1.1/TM 1.2
z S1
z MS 1
5 Ceph programs z C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4
Functions z Half-views of right/left side possible only with P1

(not upper/lower jaw).
z Constant magnification factor of 1.25 possible only with program P 1.
z No Quickshot function.
z No "jaw shape" program presetting.
z No artifact-free display mode.
z No orthodontic image series P 1 - C 3 - C 4 without cooling periods.
z No TSA configuration level.
z No TSA operation possible.
z No welcome screen.
1.3.2 XG 3 system version
5 panoramic programs z P 1, P 1C
z P 1L, P 1R
z TM 1.1/TM 1.2

z No TSA configuration level.
z No TSA operation possible.
z No welcome screen.
z
1.3.3 XG 3 PPE (pay per exposure) system version

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 with PPE concept (for USA only).
Functionality and programs identical to those of system version XG 3.
59 38 399 D3352
1–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class
1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system
1.4
class
båÖäáëÜ
The XGPlus system class is available in two configuration levels:
z Basic version
1.4
z Full version
This Service Manual describes the full version of the system.
1.4.1 Programs and functions of the basic version
10 panoramic programs z P 1, P 1C, P 2, P 10

z P 1L, P 1R
z P 12
z TM 1.1/TM 1.2
z S1
z MS 1
5 Ceph programs z C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4

z Preselection of individual quadrants not possible.
z No TSA configuration level (TSA operation retrofittable).
z No welcome screen with patient data from SIDEXIS.
z Ceph: No shadowing in upper head region with programs C3 and C3F.
z Ceph: No shadowing in thyroid region with programs C1 and C2.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1–9
1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class Tab 1
1.4.2 Programs and functions of the full version

The full version offers the following programs and functions in addition to
those featured in the basic version:
Additional Pan programs z Constant magnification factor of 1.25 P 2C, P 10C

z Artifact-free display P 1A, P 2A, P 10A
Additional functions z Selectable right/left partial view and individual quadrants

P 1A, P 2/A/C, P 10/A/C, P12.
z Selectable upper/lower jaw partial view and individual quadrants
P 1/A/C, P 2/A/C, P 10/A/C.
z Temporomandibular joint views TM 2, TM 3, TM 4, TM 5, TM 6
z Sinus views S2, S3, S4.
z Selectable "jaw shape" program setting.
z Quickshot function possible (for Pan and Ceph).
z Orthodontic image series P 1 - C 3 - C 4 without cooling periods possible.
z TSA configuration level
z TSA operation possible (optional)
z Welcome screen with patient data from SIDEXIS
(SIDEXIS V01.50 and higher).
z Ceph: Shadowing in upper head region with programs C3 and C3F.
z Ceph: Shadowing in thyroid region with programs C1 and C2.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.5 Operation notes
1.5 Operation notes
1.5
Rated line voltage The ORTHOPHOS XG X-ray unit can be operated in the following
båÖäáëÜ
rated line voltage ranges:
z 200 V - 240 V
1.5
z 50/60 Hz
The permissible line voltage fluctuations are as follows:
z 200 - 230 V: ± 10 %
The internal line impedance must not exceed max. 0.8 Ω.
i NOTE
Only permanent electrical connection of the system is allowed in Germany.
Remote control The system can be equipped with...

z a 1 - 3 m coiled cable with release button inside the treatment room or ...
z a remote control with or without coiled cable located outside the X-ray
room (see installation instructions).
Warm-up time After it is switched ON, the system requires a warm-up time of approx. 1 min.
Self-adjustment routine At the same time, a mechanical and electronic self-adjustment routine is exe-
cuted. If a button is pressed during the self-adjustment routine, an error mes-
sage is displayed on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus).
Cooling period The cooling period between two exposures is maintained by an automatic
exposure blocking function according to the pulse/pause ratio. A countdown
of the waiting time is displayed on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or
Easypad (XGPlus).
Turn-off time The turn-off time must amount to at least 60s.
Demo units If the X-ray unit is to be presented as a demo unit at trade fairs or exhibitions,
it must be ensured that radiation release is blocked (see “Demo mode –
Operation without radiation release” on page 1-13).
Software version The overall system software version is determined by the software statuses of
the EEPROMs on the boards (see “List of software versions” on page 1-16).
Wireless phone interference with To ensure safe operation of medical electrical equipment, the use of mobile
medical electrical equipment wireless phones in practice or hospital environments is prohibited.
Disposal The X-ray tube assembly contains a tube with potential implosion hazard,
a small amount of beryllium, a lead lining as well as mineral oil.
Error messages Error messages are displayed on the single-line display of the Multipad
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 11
1.5 Operation notes Tab 1
Help messages in case exposure Help messages are displayed on the single-line display of the Multipad
readiness cannot be attained (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus).
If you have to remove covers from the Proceed according to section "1.14 Removing the covers".
unit
When removing covers, always remember that direct sunlight or bright room
lighting can cause system malfunctions due to activated light barriers.
Therefore: avoid direct sunlight and bright room lighting above the unit!
When attaching the covers: be sure to screw the sheet metal cover back on.
CAUTION
For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, be sure to fasten all screws.
Reattach the covers.
Secondary diaphragm Do not manually move or otherwise exert force on the secondary diaphragm
(e.g. when removing it from its packaging).
Measurements Always switch the unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.
Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to
match the expected readings.
Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
If several exposures with radiation must be taken to check a measurement,
make sure that the prescribed cool-down intervals are observed. They are
maintained by an automatic exposure blocking function (see operating
instructions).
The pulse/pause ratio is 1: 10, i.e. a 10-second pause is maintained for each
second of radiation emission. The pulse/pause ratio is automatically main-
tained (automatic exposure blocking).
A pulse/pause ratio of 1:20 is better for the X-ray tube.
WARNING
It is essential that you observe the radiation protection regulations ap-
plicable in your country prior to radiation release.
The test rotations triggered by pressing the T key on the Easypad and then
the release button are executed without radiation.
When replacing parts Switch the unit OFF before replacing parts.
The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building installa-
tion before replacing any parts near the power supply, power switch, board
DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!
Please always wear an ESD wrist band to protect sensitive components on
printed circuit boards (ESD).
Always check the system and adjust it as required after replacing a board or
the X-ray tube assembly.
The article numbers for ordering spare parts can be found in the spare parts
list, Order No. 59 38 423. The diagrams contained in the spare parts list pro-
vide a useful guide when replacing parts.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release
1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation
1.6
release
båÖäáëÜ
1. 2.
1.6
A
3. 4.
S2
J6
Board DX6
i NOTE
Starting with system SW version V02.28, the complete possible functionality
of the system class is simulated, regardless of the current configuration.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 13
1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release Tab 1
1.6.1 Switching the demo mode ON

5. When operated in demo mode, the unit must not release any radiation. For
this reason, you must take the following safety measures:
Info menu for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
z Switch the unit OFF.
1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.
2. Loosen screws A and remove cover plate B.
P1______14.1__64_8
(
3. Set dip switch S2 (DX6) to position 2.
n
4. Pull cable L5 (X-RAY) off of connector J6 (DX6).
Radiation release is now no longer possible.
1 2 3 5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the
( info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the info screen (XGPlus).

Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON
(Radiation release is not possible)
Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF
(Radiography, X-ray radiation are possible!)
SYSTEM SOFTWARE____
( n z Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-
bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.
1 2 3
1.6.2 Switching the demo mode OFF
Scroll through the list
until the demo mode is z Switch the unit OFF.
displayed
1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.
2. Loosen screws A and remove cover plate B.
Info screen for XGPlus 3. Set dip switch S2 (DX6) to position 1.

4. Pull cable L5 (X-RAY) off of connector J6 (DX6).
Radiation release is now once again possible.
5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the
info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the info screen (XGPlus).
Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON
(Radiation release is not possible)
Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF
(Radiography, X-ray radiation are possible!)
(
z Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-
bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.
Orthophos XG configuration 2/2
Mac adress
IP adress
:
:
010001200000
192.168.15.19
)
Subnet mask : 155.155.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.15.1
Net API version : 1
Net API revision : 14 65
Demomode : ON
Tube Exposures : 2217
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport
1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport
1.7
båÖäáëÜ
1.
1.7
A
i NOTE
If the unit is installed with a floor stand, its height in-
creases by 30 mm. The bite block height value dis-
played on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or
Easypad (XGPlus) remains the same, however!
Panoramic X-ray unit z Switch the panoramic X-ray unit ON and move it to its packing height by
pressing the UP/DOWN keys on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or
Easypad (XGPlus).
– Bite block height = 965 mm (displayed as height on
Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus)
– Bottom edge of slide cover = 702 mm
i NOTE
The bottom edge of the slide cover must be at the same height as the mark-
ings A in the column.
Cephalometer z Start service routine S034, test step 6.

z Move the cephalometer to the packing position
(see page 5-143).
z For information on packing the units and on the packing condition, see the
relevant installation instructions.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 15
1.8 List of software versions Tab 1
1.8 List of software versions
i NOTE
Any software combinations other than those listed here are not allowed.
If the software version of any particular module does not match the overall
software version, the overall software version will be marked with an asterisk
on the info screen (e.g. 02.20*).
1.8.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Panoramic unit Remarks
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX81
Overall software compatible with SIDEXIS versions
02.60 02.33 02.40 02.33
V 02.28 V01.61 and higher
Overall software 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.28.2 V01.61 and higher
02.60 02.34 02.42 02.33
Overall software 02.60 02.34 02.42 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.32 02.60 02.34 02.43 02.33 V01.61 and higher
Remote control Remarks

Board DX42
Overall software
V 02.28 02.30
Overall software
02.30
V 02.28.2
Overall software 02.31
V 02.30
Overall software
V 02.31 02.31
Overall software
02.31
V 02.32
Sidexis XG Remarks Database

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE old Database
V 01.53 Overall Software Version V02.28.2 or higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE
V 01.54
Overall Software Version V02.28.2 or higher
V 01.55 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE new Database
V 02.00
V 2.2 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

59 38 399 D3352
1 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.8 List of software versions
1.8.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3
1.8
Panoramic unit Remarks
båÖäáëÜ
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX81
V 02.25 02.57 02.29 02.37 02.22 02.30 V01.45 and higher
1.8
02.60 02.31 02.39 02.23 02.32
Overall software 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.33 V01.53 and higher
02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.33
Overall software 02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.32 02.60 02.34 02.43 (02.23*) 02.33 V01.53 and higher

Board DX42
Overall software
V 02.25 02.27
Overall software
02.28
V 02.27
V 02.28
Overall software
V 02.28.2 02.30
Overall software
02.31
V 02.30
V 02.31
Overall software
V 02.32 02.31
V 01.51 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Overall Soft- old Database

ware Version V02.25 or higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Overall Soft-
V 01.53 ware Version V02.25 or higher
V 01.54
V 01.55 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Overall Soft-
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Overall Soft- new Database
V 02.00
V 2.3
* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered without
board DX41 (see also page 1-44).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 17
1.8.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph

Panoramic unit Cephalometer Remarks
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91
V 02.18.1 02.45 02.23 02.31 02.19 02.20 02.25 02.32 up to and incl. V01.44
02.56 02.28 02.33 02.22 02.26 02.29 02.34
Overall software 02.56 02.28 02.35 02.22 02.30 02.29 02.38 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.25 02.57 02.29 02.37 02.22 02.30 02.30 02.40 V01.45 and higher
02.60 02.31 02.39 02.23 02.33 02.32 02.42
Overall software 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 02.33 02.42 compatible with SIDEXIS versions
V 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43 V01.53 and higher
02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43
V 02.32 02.60 02.34 02.43 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44 V01.53 and higher

Board DX42
Overall software
V 02.18.1 02.22
Overall software
02.27
V 02.20
V 02.22
Overall software
V 02.25 02.27
Overall software
02.28
V 02.27
V 02.28
Overall software
V 02.28.2 02.30
Overall software
02.31
V 02.30
V 02.31
Overall software
V 02.32 02.31
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
1.8
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall old Database
V 01.33 - V01.44
båÖäáëÜ
Software Version < V02.20
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall
V 01.45
Software Version V02.20 or higher
1.8
V 01.50 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall
V 01.51 Software Version V02.20 or higher
V 01.53
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall new Database
V 01.61

V 2.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 19
1.8.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph

Panoramic unit Cephalometer Remarks
Board DX6 DX7 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91
V 02.17 02.41 02.25 02.30 02.16 02.17 02.23 02.31 up to and incl. V01.44
02.52 02.31 02.32 02.20 02.25 02.26 02.34
V 02.19 up to and incl. V01.44
V 02.22 02.56 02.38 02.35 02.22 02.30 02.29 02.38 V01.45 and higher
02.57 02.40 02.37 02.22 02.32 02.30 02.40
V 02.28 02.60 02.44 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 02.33 02.42 V01.53 and higher
02.60 02.44 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43
V 02.28.2 V01.53 and higher
V 02.31 02.60 02.44 02.42 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.44 V01.53 and higher
02.60 02.44 02.43 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44

Board DX42
Overall software
02.17
V 02.17
V 02.19
Overall software
V 02.20 02.27
Overall software
02.27
V 02.22
V 02.25
Overall software
V 02.27 02.28
Overall software
02.30
V 02.28
V 02.28.2
Overall software
V 02.30 02.31
Overall software
02.31
V 02.31
V 02.32
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
1.8
requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus Overall Soft- old Database
V 01.33 - V01.44
båÖäáëÜ
ware Version < V02.20
requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
V 01.45
Overall Software Version V02.20 or higher
1.8
V 01.50 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
V 01.51 Overall Software Version V02.20 or higher
V 01.53

requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus new Database
V 01.61

V 2.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 21
1.9 Software update Tab 1
1.9 Software update
1.9.1 Important information on the software update
i NOTE
Read the information provided on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD and
on the SIRONA dealer page on the internet very carefully. It always con-
tains the latest information on the software update.
i NOTE
Before performing a software update, it is essential to read the program-ver-
sion-specific information in sections 1.9.4 to 1.9.6.
CAUTION
Important for TSA operation:
For downgrading from a software version ≥ V2.20 to one < V2.20 with the TSA
mode activated, the TSA sensor holder must be equipped with the transport
safety device and set to the PAN position!
CAUTION
Important for XGPlus units with serial numbers
21007 (without Ceph) or 41001 (with Ceph):
A downgrade to a software version V02.25 must not be performed on these
units in any case. Such a downgrade would result in permanent and
irreparable failure of the user interface!
CAUTION
Important for units with the following serial numbers or higher:
ohne Ceph mit Ceph

XG 3 PPE 104000 –
XG 3 104000 –
XG 5 63500 83500
XGPlus 23500 43500
A downgrade to a software version < V02.32 cannot be performed on these

units.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.9 Software update
1.9.2 Permissible software updates
1.9
Not all software versions are suitable for both system classes. The following
båÖäáëÜ
table gives you an overview of the software version permissible for each sys-
tem class.
1.9
Overall software XG 3 PPE XG 3 XG 5 XGPlus
V 02.17 – – – X
V 02.18.1 – – X –
V 02.19 – – – X
V 02.20 – – X X
V 02.22 – – X X
V 02.25 – X X X
V 02.27 – X X X
V 02.28 X X X X
V 02.28.2 X X X X
V 02.30 X X X X
V 02.31 X X X X
V 02.32 X X X X
CAUTION
If an update is nevertheless performed accidentally, the version must be
downgraded again immediately before acknowledging any error messages or
executing any service routines!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 23
1.9.3 Performing a software update
Opening SIXABCON.exe 1. Open the SIXABCON utility program in the SIDEXIS XG program folder.
Click on SIXABCON.exe (see screen shot) or
use the pull-down menus PROGRAMS ‡ SIDEXIS ‡ CONFIGURATION OF
X-RAY COMPONENTS.
1.
to open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu 2. Open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu.
Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then SOFTWARE UPDATE.
The dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.
2.
Entering the password 3. Enter the service password.
i NOTE
As servicepassword, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in reverse
order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service password.
If an incorrect service password or no password at all is then entered, the lim-

ited update menu for users will then be started. This includes only the possi-
bility for an automatic update (see page 1-26).
The dialog box for selecting the installation source opens.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Selecting an installation source 4. IMAGE FILE is preset as the installation source for the software update.
1.9
5. Select the path and the desired update file and confirm your selection by
clicking OPEN.
båÖäáëÜ
Click on NAME UPDATE and OPEN.
1.9
NOTE
The update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. It is de-
livered with each DX11 replacement board and also included in the country
4. 5. set. The contents of the CD can be downloaded from the Dealer domain of the
SIRONA Internet home page (under Product Info ‡ X-ray Systems):
www.sirona.com
Selecting the update mode 6. Select the mode for the software update.
You can select two different update modes via the index tabs:
z Automatic
The software of all components is automatically updated to a higher soft-
ware version.
z Main version
The software can be upgraded or downgraded to the desired version.
This update mode is required e.g. if a replacement component delivered
out of stock has a newer status than the prevailing overall system status.
In this case, a main version update to the overall system status (displayed
on the info screen) must be performed for the corresponding component
with the appropriate update file (*.SUI). The module is then repro-
grammed.
(For more information on the update mode, see the next page.)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 25
User domain Service domain
Automatic Automatic Main version
(Accessible without password.) A list of modules, their installed soft- (E.g. if modules have a newer ver-
ware version and the latest software sion status than the overall system
version offered by the update func- following module replacement.)
tion is displayed in the right pane.
i NOTE
Modules which are connected and whose program status agrees

with that of the current main program version are marked by a continuous
green bar.
Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration

(e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not
connected, are marked by a broken red bar.
If the actual status of the module could not be polled forthe update, the actu-
al SW version will then be displayed as = V00:00.
If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be pro-

grammed or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the
update file, this will be indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.
If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software ver-
sion of the unit, then there will be no display in the right window. The down-
grade required in this case is possible only via the MAIN VERSION mode.
7. Select the update mode and the update or component.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Starting the update 8. Start the update by clicking START UPDATE.
1.9
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Before starting the software update, make sure that no unit movements are
active (especially any diaphragm movements)! Otherwise the system may be-
come inoperable in rare cases.
1.9
All of the sensors located in the unit (Pan or Ceph) must be inserted in the cor-
responding slots. Exposure readiness must be deselected in SIDEXIS and the
system must not be in the service mode already.
The update is started. A message box informs you when the update pro-
cess is completed. Confirm the update with OK.
7.
Checking the log file 9. Check the log file to make sure that the update was completed success-
fully.
Click SHOW LOGFILE.
i NOTE
If messages such as Update of DXxx failed! appear there, please perform
the update again. Repeat this procedure as often as necessary until the
“failed” messages no longer appear.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 27
10. Reboot the system.
CAUTION
It is always necessary to reboot the system after any software
update. (The new DX11 version will run only after the system has been reboo-
ted (see also Section 6.20.1, "Measures following replacement of boards").
i NOTE
Any errors with the consecutive numbers 01, 03, 04, 06 and/or 07 displayed
immediately following the software update may be ignored. If these messages
appear again after the unit is rebooted, perform troubleshooting according to
Section 2.5.
If anything conspicuous occurs in connection with system handling on com-

pletion of the software update, please repeat the software update as the first
measure. Also check whether the system software version is displayed with-
out an asterisk (*) on the info screen.
Checking the program versions 11. Check whether all modules contain the current program version via the
SW Update Manager or service routine S008.2 (see page 5-48).
Program version included.
i NOTE
Modules which are connected and whose program status agrees with
that of the current main program version are marked by a continuous green
bar.
Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration

(e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not
connected, are marked by a broken red bar.
If the actual status of the module could not be polled forthe update, the actual
SW version will then be displayed as = V00:00.
If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be pro-

SW Update Manager
grammed or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the
update file, this will be indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.
If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software ver-
sion of the unit, then there will be no display in the right window. The down-
grade required in this case is possible only via the MAIN VERSION mode.
12. Open the "Extended Details“ via SIXABCON.

This generates an XML file (with the system parameters) which is filed un-
der the network name of the system in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder (see
also section 1.10 on page 1-32).
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
1.9.4 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XG 5 to
1.9
V02.30 or higher
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
If the sensors previously used are to be used in the future as well, plug them
1.9
into the slots on the panoramic unit and/or cephalometer before you begin the
update.
1. Switch the unit ON.

2. Execute the software update to Version V02.30 or higher (automatic up-
date) as described on page 1-24.
3. Switch the unit OFF.
Wait for approx. 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.
Error message E6 15 04 (undefined activation data) is displayed.
(
4. Acknowledge the error message with the R key R .
E6 15 04 R
5. Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter

4.4).
z The process is completed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 29
1.9.5 Software Update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

from V02.20 to V02.30 or higher
i NOTE
update.

(
E6 15 04 R
5. Open the Service menu (see page 5-10).

6. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the unit serial number (see page
5-50).
i NOTE
The unit serial number is located on the rating plate of the unit.
CAUTION
In case of a wrong serial number, cancel the update and contact the SIRONA
Customer Service Center!
7. Start service routine S008.3 and enable the function activation. Exit the
Service menu again.
9. Perform the complete system adjustment (see chapter ):
– PAN adjustment
– For TSA units: TSA adjustment
– CEPH adjustment if cephalometer is installed
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
1.9.6 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from
1.9
V02.22 to V02.30 or higher
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
1.9
update.

– Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter
4.4).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 31
1.10 Selecting More details Tab 1
1.10 Selecting More details

Opening SIXABCON.exe 1. Open the SIXABCON utility program in the SIDEXIS XG program folder.
Click on SIXABCON.exe (see screen shot) or
use the pull-down menus PROGRAMS ‡ SIDEXIS ‡ CONFIGURATION OF
X-RAY COMPONENTS.
1.
Opening the EXTENDED DETAILS menu 2. Open the EXTENDED DETAILS menu.
Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then EXTENDED DETAILS.
The current parameters are read from the unit and stored as an XML file
under the network name of the unit in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder.
This process can take up to 30 seconds.
2.
After the parameters are read, an editor displaying the XML file is opened
automatically.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.10 Selecting More details
1.10
i NOTE
You can scroll down further in the file using the scroll bar. The "Changed
båÖäáëÜ
system parameters", i.e. the system parameters that were modified in relation
to the factory setting, are displayed there. This is especially interesting after a
module change. The parameter settings can thus be easily traced.
1.10
1951C59C.txt
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------- Changed Systemparameter ---------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following systemparameters have been changed compared to the factory
settings.
After replacing an DX11-PCB, the listed values must be reconfigured.
--- Changed System Configuration Settings ---

Setting of system version (configured in S17.2)
actual value: 0x0043
Setting of head rest type (configured in S17.10)
actual value: 1
Setting of language index (configured in S17.4)
Setting of language-set index (configured in S17.5)
Setting of remote control activation (configured in S17.6)
actual value: active (01)
Setting of DX41 configuration (configured in S17.9)
actual value: mounted (01)
Setting of image format (configured in S17.11)
actual value: enabled (01)
Settings of welcome-screen configuration (configured in S17.14)
actual value: 01=1, 02=1, 03=1, 04=1, 05=0, 06=0, 07=0, 08=0
Settings of CEPH-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160
Settings of CEPH-adjustment QuickShot (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160
Settings of PAN- and TSA-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = -202 | DX = -191 | DY = -6044 | A1 = 0 | A2 = 0 | C1 =
-77
Setting of ring type (configured in S34.7)
actual value: 100
Setting of kVmA level series (configured in S17.8)
actual value: FIFO_2A
Settings of network configuration
actual value: IP: 192.168.15.176 | Subnet: 255.255.255.0 | Gateway:
192.168.15.1
--- Changed User Preference Settings ---

Settings of patientensymbols PAN (configured in 'select basic settings')
Settings of patientensymbols CEPH (configured in 'select basic settings')
Setting of anomaly default (configured in 'select starting settings')
Setting of default patientsymbol PAN (configured in 'select starting settings')
Setting of default patientsymbol CEPH (configured in 'select starting settings')
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 33
1.11 The most important modules and components Tab 1
1.11 The most important modules and components

The X-ray system comprises the following main modules:
z Slide with rotary unit
z Stand
z Cephalometer, arm on right side or on left side (optional)
z Remote control (optional)
Slide
(see section 1.11.1)
Cephalometer,
arm on right side or on left side
Remote control Stand

(see section 1.11.4) (see section 1.11.2)
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.11 The most important modules and components
1.11.1 Slide
1.11
DX11
båÖäáëÜ
1.11
MU M1*, M2*
LS
LS*
DX1
LS
DX5*
M AK1, M AK2 DX6*
DX81P*, DX85P*
DX61**
DX7* Easypad (XGPlus)
DX71 *) not available as individual spare part

(see spare parts list)
Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) **) not for XG 3 / 3 PPE (fixed diaphragm)
Component Designation Function

Boards DX1 Open-loop/automatic control in general
DX11 Controller board
DX5* Headrest adapter
DX6* Open-loop/automatic control for tube assembly
DX7* Touchscreen on the Easypad (XGPlus)
DX71 LED display on Multipad (XG 5)
DX61** Diaphragm control
DX81P Digital sensor
DX85P* Digital sensor power supply
Motors M1*, M2* Linear movement of headrest
MU Rotary movement of rotating element
AK1, AK2 Linear movement of rotating element
Light barriers LS Position check
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 35
1.11 The most important modules and components Tab 1
1.11.2 Stand
M HA
DX32*
DX41**

Boards DX32* Power supply board
DX41** Interface board
Motors M HA Linear movement of height adjustment
* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered with
the new version of board DX32 (see Section 1.9).
** As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered without
board DX41.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.11 The most important modules and components
1.11.3 Cephalometer
1.11
(arm mounted on left side or on right side)
båÖäáëÜ
1.11
DX91
MS
LS

Boards DX91 Cephalometer control
Motors MS Stepping motors:

linear movement of secondary diaphragm
and sensor
Light barriers LS Position check
1.11.4 Remote control
DX42

Boards DX42 Display board for remote control
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 37
1.12 Cabling overview Tab 1
1.12 Cabling overview

1 DX1
4 5
DX6
2
Power switch
3 3
DX32 / X2
DX6 / X3
DX32
4 1
DX32 / X1
2
DX1 / X100
Line filter
5
DX1 / J302
DX6 / J6
6 Wago terminal
DX1 / J306 – J302
DX6 / J2 – J3
DX1
7 6
DX1 / J901
10
DX41
DX6
8* DX61
9
DX41 / X100
DX1 / X303
DX7/DX71
11
108*
8/108*
9
7
DX1 / X104
DX7 / X102
10
* Unit HW version BA and higher
DX1 / X302
DX7 / X103
** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version

BA and higher
11
DX41**
DX61 / X501
DX1 / X102
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.12 Cabling overview
1.12
12 18
DX1
DX61 / X101
DX1 / X306
båÖäáëÜ
13
DX5
19
13
1.12
16
LS sensor
DX81
DX61
M HA
16
DX1 / X404
12
18
DX1 / X610
DX5 / X1
19
DX1 / X403
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 39
1.12 Cabling overview Tab 1
Potentiometer
17 DX1
DX91
31 21 21 MU 23
DX42 / X100
DX41 / X103
LS Sensor
21
22/24*** /24***
117*
DX61
38
Laser module
21 DX81 35
DX61
DX42
22
DX91
23 17/117*
DX5
24***
25
DX41**
DX61
25 Media converter
* Unit HW version BA and higher
** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version
Media Konverter
BA and higher
DX41
31
35
DX81 / X100
38
DX1 / X503
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.12 Cabling overview
1.12
36 DX91 DX1
36 39
DX91 / X6
båÖäáëÜ
40
1.12
37
DX91 / X101
37
39
DX1 / X103
40
DX1 / X309
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 41
1.13 Illustrations of boards Tab 1
1.13 Illustrations of boards
1.13.1 Boards in the slide
Boards DX1 / DX11

To facilitate cable routing to the side, RJ 45 connectors with a 45° incline were introduced in August 2006.
X104 X402 J309 only with GALILEOS

DX1 J302
X403 J306
X611 X303 X302 X306 X309
X100 J307 X503 X307
X607
X103
X500
X102
X1000
X404
X804
X802
X803
X811
DX11
X812
X813
X610
Board DX5
X7 X5 X3
X4 X6 X1 X2
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 1 1.13 Illustrations of boards
Board DX6 (not available as spare part)
1.13
X1 X305 X306 X2
båÖäáëÜ
1.13
J2
J3
J6
S2
X3
F201
Board DX61 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
X501
X101
X202
X203
X406 X405 X402 X401 X400 X201 X304 X303 X302 X301 X300 X200
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 43
Board DX7 (XGPlus only, not available as repair part)
i NOTE
Board DX7 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Easypad may be
replaced only as a complete unit!
Board DX7 (XG 5/3/3 PPE only, not available as repair part)
X104 X106
X203
X202
X103 X102
i NOTE
Board DX71 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Multipad may be
replaced only as a complete unit!
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Boards DX81P / DX85P (not available as repair parts)
båÖäáëÜ 1.13
DX81
1.13
DX85
i NOTE
Boards DX81 and DX85 are shown here only for enhanced clarity.
CAUTION
It is not allowed to open the sensor! The sensor may be replaced only as
a complete unit!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 45
1.13.2 Boards in the stand
Board DX32
up to unit hardware version AG
X1 F100
X100
F101 F102 F103 X2
Board DX32
as of unit hardware version BA
(from November 2006)
X1 F100
X100
F101 F102 X2
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Board DX41
1.13
omitted as of unit hardware version BA
båÖäáëÜ
1.13
X100
X102 X104 X103
1.13.3 Boards in the cephalometer

(arm mounted on right side or on left side)
Board DX91
X308 X307 X306 X501
X101
X202
X407
X201 X304 X302
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 47
1.13.4 Boards in the remote control
Board DX42
up to unit hardware version AG
V101
X100 X105
X200
V103
X201
X101
V100 X107
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Board DX42
1.13
as of unit hardware version BA
båÖäáëÜ
1.13
V101
X108 X105 Jumper X109 und X110
X200
V103
X201
X101
V100 X107
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 49
1.14 Removing the covers Tab 1
1.14 Removing the covers
13
4
10
5
11
6
12
7
2
1
1. Profile cover
2. Intermediate piece
3. Arm cover, top
4. Slide cover, top rear
14
5. Slide cover, bottom rear
6. Support cover, top
7. Support cover, bottom
8. Tube assembly cover, front
9. Tube assembly cover, rear
10. Slide cover, center rear
11. Sensor holder cover
12. Slide cover, front complete
13. Ring cover
14. Cephalometer cover
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
2 Messages
Tab 2
Contents
2.1 Help messages .......................................................2 – 3
2.2 System messages ...................................................2 – 6
2.3 Status displays ........................................................2 – 6
2.4 Error messages .......................................................2 – 6

2.4.1 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 7
2.4.2 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 8
2.4.3 Ex yy zz ................................................................ 2 – 8
2.4.4 General handling of error messages .................... 2 – 8
2.5 List of error messages.............................................2 – 9
2.6 List of available service routines ...........................2 – 62
59 38 399 D3352
2–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 2
2 Messages
båÖäáëÜ
The different message texts are displayed...
z For XGPlus: on the Easypad touchscreen
z For XG5/3/3 PPE: on the Multipad display
z on the display of the remote control
There are 3 groups of message texts:
z Help messages (Hxxx)

– Help messages are caused by operator errors
– The user must take action
z Error messages (Exyyzz)

– Error messages indicate system faults
– The user must take action to eliminate the fault(s)
z System messages (Sxxx)

– System messages inform the user about the current operating status of
the system
– The user is not required to take action
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2–3
2.1 Help messages Tab 2
2.1 Help messages

Help messages are displayed as help codes (Hxxx) on the touchscreen of the
Easypad (XGPlus), on the display of the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) or on the
remote control display (if available). The codes tell you how to operate the
system if radiation release is not possible due to a previous operator error.
The following list provides you with an overview of all help codes, their mean-
ing and the action required to eliminate the corresponding problems:
Help code Description Actions required

H3 01 The rotating element on the panoramic unit is z Press the R key:
not located in its starting position. The panoramic unit moves to the starting
position.
H3 10 The system is performing an action. z Wait until the system is ready.
H3 20 The exposure parameters have not been z Press the R key:
acknowledged yet. The exposure parameters are confirmed.
H3 21 The X-ray room door contact is not detected. z Close the door or check door contact.
H3 22 Quadrant for TSA exposure is not selected. z Select quadrant via Easypad.
(for XGPlus only)
H3 30 Indicates number of exposures remaining z Request new activation code via Sirona
(XG 3 PPE only) (PPE concept). Customer Service Center (CSC) in due
time.
1. After each switch-on (see S017.22)
2. After each exposure if the number of expo-
sures remaining is below the defined warning
level (see S017.23)
H3 31 No further exposures available. z Enter new activation code.
(XG 3 PPE only)
H4 01 The sensor on the panoramic unit is not properly z Plug sensor into PAN slot.
plugged in or is missing.
i HINWEIS
If this message does not disappear after the
sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-
ror. Perform error diagnosis according to
Section 3.2.
H4 02 The sensor on the cephalometer is not properly z Plug sensor into Ceph slot.
plugged in or is missing.
i HINWEIS
If this message does not disappear after the
sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-
ror. Perform error diagnosis according to
Section 3.2.
H4 03 SIDEXIS is not ready for exposure. z Make SIDEXIS ready for exposure.
H4 04 The sensor does not match the selected expo- z Plug in the ceph sensor.
sure type
H4 05 The sensor does not match the selected expo- z Plug in the TSA sensor.
sure type
H4 06 The cephalometer is not located in its starting z Press the R key:
position. The cephalometer moves to the starting po-
sition.
59 38 399 D3352
2–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 2 2.1 Help messages
Help code Description Actions required

H4 07 Unit supports default settings for this exposure, z Perform alternative program setting.
båÖäáëÜ
since the settings specified by SIDEXIS cannot
be taken over.
H4 10 The sensor is being polled. z Wait until the message disappears.
H4 20 The image could not be transferred to SIDEXIS. z Retrieve the exposure with SiRescue (see
SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
VORSICHT
2.1
Do not switch the system off until the help mes-
sage has disappeared.
i HINWEIS
The above measures clear those help messages that result from operator er-
rors. If it is not possible to clear the help message by taking the above mea-
sures, another type of error is the cause. To identify the error, proceed as de-
scribed in section 2.5 .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2–5
2.2 System messages Tab 2
2.2 System messages
System code Description Actions required

S100 ORTHOPHOS XG is started z Wait, no action required
S110 Exposure cannot be performed. z Quit readiness for exposure,
switch unit OFF, wait for 30 sec., switch unit
back ON and observe error messages dis-
played after switch-on.
z Repeat procedure if necessary
2.3 Status displays
Status displays (for XGPlus only) Description

ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure The unit is ready for operation.
Wait until ORTHOPHOS is ready Unit waiting on readiness for operation.
ORTHOPHOS is ready in XX s The cooling time countdown is running.
X-RAY active! Exposure in progress.
2.4 Error messages

Error messages are displayed as error codes (Ex yy zz) on the touchscreen
of the Easypad (XGPlus), on the display of the Multipad (XG 5/3/3 PPE) or on
the remote control display (if available).
The codes provide you with error type, error location and troubleshooting
information.
Error code: Ex yy zz The error messages are encoded according to the following pattern:
Ex yy zz
Error type Location Consecutive number
“Troubleshooting” Module, subsystem or logi- with error ID

classification for the cal function unit
The error messages are sorted by modules in the table on page 2-7.
59 38 399 D3352
2–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 2 2.4 Error messages
2.4.1 Ex yy zz
Identifier x is supposed to help you quickly reach a decision on how to pro-
båÖäáëÜ
ceed with this error.
x Description Error group Actions required

1 System warning; This error group includes all errors that indi- z Acknowledge the error message to con-
system message cate still acceptable tolerance variations, or tinue system operation. If the error oc-
messages about states which do not directly curs repeatedly, switch the system OFF
affect system operation. and back ON.
2.4
If the error occurs again: Identify the error
by proceeding as described in section
2.5.
2 Errors caused by sys- This error group includes states that indicate z Acknowledge the error message.
tem overload e.g. temporary overtemperatures or the like. z Repeat the procedure step after a certain
The cause of the error disappears automati- waiting time.
cally after a certain waiting time.
– If the error message reappears, pro-
long the waiting time.
– If the error state persists: Identify the
error by proceeding as described in
section 2.5.
3 The system detects This error group includes all errors that indi- z Switch unit OFF and ON again.
that a key was pressed cate invalid signal states of keys and safety If the error occurs again, identify the error
during power-on signals during power-on. by proceeding as described in section
2.5.
4 Malfunction or This error group includes all errors that indi- z Acknowledge the error message and
mechanical obstruction cate problems with the motor-controlled make sure that the movements of the unit
of unit movements movements on the outside of the unit. are not obstructed.
z Repeat the last procedure step or expo-
sure. If the error reoccurs without any
identifiable cause: Identify the error by
proceeding as described in section 2.5.
5 Malfunction during the This error group includes all errors resulting z Acknowledge the error message.
exposure or during from a certain system action triggered by the z Repeat the last procedure step or expo-
exposure preparation user which could not be performed because sure. If the error occurs again: Identify
a required (internal) partial function (soft- the error by proceeding as described in
ware or hardware) is not ready or fails. section 2.5.
6 Error during system This error group includes all errors which z Acknowledge the error message.
self-test may occur spontaneously and without any z Identify the error by proceeding as de-
related operator action. They may be scribed in section 2.5.
caused by system self-tests.
Note:
Operation of the unit can be continued.
7 Unrecoverable sys- This error group includes all errors which z Identify the error by proceeding as de-
tem error may occur spontaneously and without any scribed in section 2.5.
related operator action. They may be
caused by system self-tests. In this case it is
absolutely sure that continued system oper-
ation is not possible.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2–7
2.4 Error messages Tab 2
2.4.2 Ex yy zz
Identifier yy defines the location or logical function unit where the error has
occurred.
yy Location/Function unit Board

06 Tube assembly DX6
61 Diaphragm control (not for XG 3/3 PPE, fixed diaphragm) DX61
Plus
07 User interface on the Easypad (XG ) DX7
71 User interface on the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) DX71
10 System hardware DX11/DX1
11 System software DX11/DX1
12 CAN bus DX11/DX1
13 Stand peripherals DX11/DX1
14 Digital extension DX11/DX1
15 Configuration/update (wrong software, wrong module constellation, etc...) DX11/DX1
41 Media interface card (omitted as of HW version BA, November 2006) DX41
42 Remote control DX42
81 Sensor (Pan slot: zz=1-23 ; ceph slot: zz= 51-73) DX81
91 Cephalometer DX91
The location may be a DX module number standing for an entire HW function

unit, or a logical SW function unit on board DX11 (central control).
2.4.3 Ex yy zz
Identifier zz constitutes a consecutive number with the
error identification.
2.4.4 General handling of error messages

Error messages always must be acknowledged with the R key.
If failure-free operation is possible after the error is acknowledged, then no
further action is necessary.
If error messages reoccur or occur frequently, identify the error as described
in section 2.5 and take appropriate action to eliminate the corresponding error
or fault.
In some cases, it may make sense to obtain more information on the history
and frequency of errors via the error logging memory (S007) and SIXAB-
CON‡PROPERTIES‡EXTENDED DETAILS (see section 1.10 on page 1-32)
(see also section 3.1).
59 38 399 D3352
2–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 2 2.5 List of error messages
2.5 List of error messages
båÖäáëÜ
HINWEIS
In the following table, the error codes are sorted by the location or function unit
where the error has occurred. For enhanced clarity, the corresponding ID in
the error code is printed in bold type.
Location 06: Tube assembly / Board
2.5
Error code Description Actions required see page
E6 06 01 General error during module initializa- z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
tion Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
means of a software update is possible and per-
form such an update if necessary.
z If the error occurs frequently, 6-38
replace the X-ray tube assembly
E6 06 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
module storage data z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 06 03 Invalid commanding of control data, z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
CAN bus error z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
Note: means of a software update is possible and per-
This error may also occur in connec- form such an update if necessary.
tion with other causal error messages!
Please also observe the causal error
message! It appears only after you
acknowledge the first error message.
E6 06 04 Data transfer error or dialog error to z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
module (master side) z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
E6 06 05 Data transfer error or dialog error to z Repeat software update 1-22
bootloader of module z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Note: z If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is 6-38
Occurs only in connection with soft- no longer addressable, replace
ware update the tube assembly
E6 06 06 Module failed in TTP* z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
(detected on master side) z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
tion with other causal error messages.
Please also observe the causal error z If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is 6-38
message! It appears only after you no longer addressable, replace
acknowledge the first error message. the tube assembly
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2–9
2.5 List of error messages Tab 2

E6 06 07 TTP* timeout error z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
(detected on slave side) z Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
Note: point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
The module was temporarily not – If 3.3 V are present, replace board DX11 6-59
addressed by the master:
- Undervoltage on the master side – If 3.3 V are not present, replace board DX1 6-59
- Procedure error in the software
- Master (DX11) receives no
– Check cable L6, 3-17
return commanding from the module
replace if necessary 6-91
Note:
This error may also occur in connec- – Check tube assembly (DX6)
tion with other causal error messages! replace if necessary 6-38
E6 06 08 General fault detected locally on mod- z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
ule (slave side). CAN controller being z Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-48
reinitialized. vice routine S008.2,
perform a software update if necessary 1-22
z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E7 06 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage z Check board DX6 (note LED states) 3-12
If the board remains in the bootloader stage...
z Repeat software update 1-22
E7 06 12 Unit is not ready for operation z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Note: If this error occurs in combination with other errors
This error may also occur in connec-
z Unit restart:
tion with other causal error messages!
Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
Switch unit ON.
acknowledge the first error message. Repeat procedure and observe causal error
messages.
E6 06 13 Error when writing to EEPROM z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Note: If the error occurs again...

Stored data may be lost z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E2 06 20 Overtemperature of single tank/power z Wait until the X-ray tube assembly has cooled
pack down.
z Check fan function using service routine 5-31
S005.4;
replace fan if necessary 6-42
z Check temperature sensor in single 5-33
tank using service routine S005.5,
replace tube assembly if necessary 6-38
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E6 06 21 Hardware signal of release button not z Check cable L5 (fiber optic cable), 3-17
detected
båÖäáëÜ
z Replace board DX1 6-59
E6 06 22 Broken temperature sensor z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E3 06 23 Hardware signal of release button z Check cable L5:
2.5
applied during power-on – Switch unit OFF
– Pull cable L5 off of tube assembly
– Switch the unit ON
– Perform optical check of L5:
- If light is visible: Replace board DX1 6-59
- If no light is visible, replace the tube as- 6-38
sembly
E5 06 30 Total radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
E5 06 31 Partial radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
E5 06 32 Minimum preheating time not If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
observed z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
E1 06 40 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
- nom. z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E1 06 41 Tolerance exceeded: kV - nom. z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E1 06 42 Tolerance exceeded: mA - nom. z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E1 06 43 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
- act. z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E1 06 44 Tolerance exceeded: kV - act. z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E1 06 45 Tolerance exceeded: mA - act. z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 11

E6 06 50 Undervoltage in intermediate circuit z Check fuse F201 on board DX6 (see wiring dia-
(400 V) grams), replace if necessary
z Check cable L3 (tube assembly), 3-17
z Check electronic fuse on board DX32:
– Switch unit OFF
– Wait for at least 7 minutes (due to electronic
fuse)
– Switch unit back ON
– Check functioning
If the error occurs again...
z Check board DX32, 3-12
E6 06 51 VHmax z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E6 06 52 MAmax z Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E6 06 53 KVmax Perform service routines S005.2 5-29
E7 06 54 Basic heating pulses not applied z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E6 06 56 Error during auto-compensation z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
z Let the tube assembly cool down for approx. 30
min and repeat this procedure.
DX6 *) TTP = Time Trigger Protocol
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 07 (XGPlus): Easypad/Board DX7
båÖäáëÜ
z Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 3-12
2.5
Replace Easypad 6-21
E6 07 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
module storage data Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E6 07 03 Invalid commanding or control data z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Note: z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
This error may also occur in connec- Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
tion with other causal error messages. means of a software update is possible and per-
Please also observe the causal error form such an update if necessary.
Note: z Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 6-59
Occurs only in connection with
software update Replace Easypad 6-21
Note: Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
This error may also occur in connec- means of a software update is possible and per-
tion with other causal error messages. form such an update if necessary.
Please also observe the causal error z Replace Easypad 6-21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 13

Note:
E7 07 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage z Check user interface with electronics (DX7) 3-12
(note LED states)
Note: This error is a sequential fault.
Therefore, the error can be displayed
z Unit restart:
only on the remote control (DX42).
Switch unit ON.
z Repeat procedure and observe causal error
messages.
E6 07 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during z Note error message on remote control (DX42)
operation. and check log memory (via extended details)
z Check cable L9, 3-17
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E7 07 21 No CAN bus connection. z Start the detail query via Sixabcon
DX11 does not start.
båÖäáëÜ
If DX11 responds...
Note: z Check signal path to DX7,
Occurs after power-on in the start
screen. repair or replace cable/connector if necessary 6-91
z Replace DX1 6-59
If DX11 does not respond...
2.5
z Replace DX11 6-59
E3 07 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur- z Unit restart:
ing power-on Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the Easypad
E3 07 31 Forehead support key pressed during
is not actuated during boot-up.
power-on
E3 07 32 Temple support keys actuated during If the error occurs again...
power-on z Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or
E3 07 33 Light localizer key actuated during 6-59
Replace Easypad
power-on 6-21
E3 07 34 Test key actuated during power-on
E3 07 35 Return key actuated during power-on
E3 07 36 Touchscreen actuated during power-
on
E6 07 40 No valid language set found z Check selected language set using service rou- 5-86
tine S017.5, correct if necessary
i 1-22
HINWEIS
Check whether selected language set is already in-
stalled, perform software update if necessary.

*) TTP = Time Trigger Protocol
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 15
Location 10: System hardware

E7 10 01 EEPROM cannot be written. z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E7 10 02 FPGA* of DX1 is not addressable. z Replace board DX1 6-59
E1 10 03 The flash file system must be format- z Acknowledge error
ted.
i HINWEIS
Note: The flash file system is formatted and error message
Occurs after replacement of board E1_10_04 is displayed.
DX11.
E1 10 04 Flash file system formatting in z Wait until the message automatically disap-
progress. pears (approx. 2 - 3 min.)
E1 10 05 Flash file system is not ready for oper- z Execute service routine S009.4 and 5-56
ation. format flash file system.
i HINWEIS
The contents of the error memory are thus lost.

*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 11: Power PC, board DX11
båÖäáëÜ
E6 11 01 Program sequence error z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
means of a software update is possible and
perform such an update if necessary.
2.5
z Reset the entire unit adjustment (Pan, Ceph, 4-3
TSA) and readjust the unit
E6 11 02 Watchdog error z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E6 11 03 Operating system/resource error z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E7 11 04 Implausible data in EEPROM z Check the device configuration via service rou- 5-77, 5-109
tines S017 and S018 and reconfigure if neces-
sary
z Check adjustment with diaphragm test expo- 7-17
sures
If the adjustment is not OK...
z Readjust the unit 4-3
If the adjustment is OK...
z perform the individual system settings again
(e.g. programming of the patient symbol keys;
see operating instructions)
E6 11 05 RAM allocation failed z Replace board DX11 6-59
E7 11 07 Unknown or invalid definition of system z Perform actions required according to Chapter 6-59
class "Replacing circuit boards".
Note:
Occurs during first power-on after
replacement of board DX6 or DX11.
E7 11 08 The user interface connected to this z Install the user interface compliant with the 6-21
unit does is not compliant with the system class configuration of this unit
unit's system class configuration
E5 11 09 Internal error in program flow of board z Acknowledge error
DX11
z Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 17

E1 11 10 The system is operating with default z Read out log memory and take the appropriate
settings; exposure is possible actions
z Readjust the unit 4-3
Note:
If this error occurs in combination with If the error occurs again...
errors E1 61 02, E1 91 02 or E1 11 04
z Replace the defective module (DX61, DX91 or 6-5
(see error logging memory), these
DX11).
additional errors provide an indication
of the module involved.
E7 11 11 Wrong device configuration z Check the device configuration via service rou- 5-78
tine S017.2 and reconfigure if necessary
E7 11 12 Internal error in data management of If the error occurs after a module has been
board DX11 replaced...
z display "Extended Details" via SIXABCON and
coordinate all further action with the Sirona
Customer Service Center.
If no module has been replaced...
z switch the unit off, wait for 30 seconds
and then switch it back on.
z Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-48
vice routine S008.2,
z Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-22
E6 11 13 Up to HW version AG: z see section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY 3-18
Short circuit in radiation release signal control signal path" up to unit hardware version
path between board DX42 and board AG (with board DX41)"
DX41 (cable L17).
The release signal was detected on
boards DX11 and DX41, but not on
board DX42.
Up to HW version BA (from 11.2006):
Short circuit in radiation release signal
path between board DX42 and board
DX11 (cables L117 and L108).
board DX11, but not on board DX42
E7 11 14 Wrong remote control for this unit z Install the correct remote control.
If necessary, obtain new remote control
i HINWEIS from the manufacturer.
This error message blocks all unit func- (A remote control from GALILEOS or from
tions. Work is possible at the unit again an outside manufacturer might have been con-
after the remote control is unplugged nected)
and the unit is switched off and on
again.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E1 11 88 The unit is set to the demo mode If the user mode is expressly required...
båÖäáëÜ
Note: z Switch the demo mode OFF 1-13
Occurs when the unit is switched on.
VORSICHT
Radiation can be released after the demo mode is
switched off!
2.5
Location 12: CAN bus

E6 12 01 CAN controller init error on DX1 z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
E6 12 02 CAN malfunction (cannot be assigned z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
to module)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 19
Location 13: Stand, peripherals

E4 13 01 Actuator 1 has not reached pan home z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running.
In case of stiffness...
z manually reset the actuators to the zero position
and run a test cycle via P1.
z Check light barrier V1_1 (X802) with service 5-74
routine S015.5,
replace light barrier if necessary 6-49
z Check electric drive and jolt-free running with 5-74
service routine S015.5 (free travel),
z replace the actuators and/or spindles and 6-17
replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59
E4 13 02 Actuator 1 has not left pan home posi- z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
tion smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E5 13 03 Malfunction of actuator 1 z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
during operation smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E4 13 04 Actuator 1; position counter error z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
smooth and easy running.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
routine S015.5,
2.5
E6 13 05 Actuator 1 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 07 Error when activating actuator 1 z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON and check functioning.
E4 13 11 Actuator 2 has not reached pan home z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E4 13 12 Actuator 2 has not left pan home posi- z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
tion smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 21

E5 13 13 Malfunction of actuator 2 z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
during operation smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E4 13 14 Actuator 2; z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position counter error smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E6 13 15 Actuator 2 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 17 Error when activating actuator 2 z Unit restart:
E4 13 21 Ring motor has not reached pan home z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running,
reset actuators to zero position of necessary.
z Check the ring drive mechanism manually for
smooth and easy running,
replace the ring motor or mechanism if neces- 6-14
sary
routine S014.4,
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
service routine S014.3,
E4 13 22 Ring motor has not left pan home z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
2.5
sary
routine S014.4,
E5 13 23 Malfunction of ring motor z Acknowledge error
during operation
E4 13 24 Ring motor; z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position counter error smooth and easy running,
sary
routine S014.4,
E4 13 25 Ring motor has not reached ceph z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
home position smooth and easy running,
sary
routine S014.4,
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 23

E4 13 26 Ring motor has not left ceph home z Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
sary
routine S014.4,
E6 13 27 Ring motor is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 28 Error when activating ring motor z Unit restart:
messages
E4 13 30 No height adjustment motor pulses z Check cable L16 (X402), 3-17
z Check filter between HA motor and L16
(acc. to circuit diagram on filter)
(current and voltage).
replace if necessary
z Check height adjustment motor incl. pulse gen- 3-14
erator,
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E5 13 31 Unit has traveled to upper limit switch z Check max. travel height with service routine 5-110
S018.2, adjust if necessary
båÖäáëÜ
z Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
z Check light barriers V1_4 3-15
2.5
z Check HA motor for overtravel,
replace DX1 if necessary 6-59
z check the limit switch or wiring,
correct or replace the limit switch if necessary
E5 13 32 Unit has traveled to lower limit switch z Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/ 5-110
DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
z Check light barriers V1_4 3-15
z Check HA motor for overtravel,
z check the limit switch or wiring,
correct or replace the limit switch if necessary
E5 13 33 Height adjustment motor position z Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
counter too small for current position DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
Note:
z Check max. travel height using service routine 5-110
Error may occur after replacement of
S018.2, adjust if necessary
board (DX11)
z Check light barriers V1_4, 3-15
E5 13 34 Height adjustment motor position z Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
counter too large for current position DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or the
Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) and reference (value
Note: approx. 1500)
Error may occur after replacement of
z Check light barriers V1_4, 3-15
board (DX11)
i 5-113
HINWEIS
As an aid, the current switching state can be queried
via service routine S018.4.
E5 13 35 Height adjustment motor; z Check connector assignment on filter or in front

wrong direction of rotation of HA motor,
correct if necessary
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 25

E5 13 36 Software signal of key is applied, but z Check cables L9 and L10, 3-17
hardware signal is not replace if necessary 6-91
z Check limit switches SE1_1 and SE1_2, 7-4
z Replace the user interface 6-21
(Easypad for XGPlus,
Multipad for XG5 / XG 3)
E7 13 37 Overtravel of HA motor occurs or z Check HA motor for overtravel,
height adjustment power transistor replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59
defective
z Unit restart:
E6 13 38 Height adjustment motor is not ready This error is a sequential fault.
for operation
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 39 Error when activating height adjust- z Unit restart:
ment motor Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
E3 13 40 Release signal applied during power- z Unit restart:
on. Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the release
button is not pressed during boot-up.
z Check the X-ray signal path 3-18
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E3 13 41 Release signal not applied on DX11 z Check signal path for interruption according to
wiring diagrams, replace component if neces-
båÖäáëÜ
sary
z Deactivate remote control with service routine 5-78
S017.6; connect release button directly to DX41
(instead of cable L17) and check for proper
functioning
z Check release button
2.5
If the release button is functioning...
If the release button is not functioning...
E6 13 42 The hardware signal for radiation z Check the X-ray signal path 3-18
release is applied on board DX1 dur-
ing unit operation even when no actu-
ated X-RAY release button is reported
via the CAN bus.
E5 13 43 The door was opened during the z Check the X-ray signal path 3-18
exposure.
E5 13 50 Forehead support; has not left home z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
position despite movement pulses replace headrest or 6-19
light barrier if necessary 6-49
E4 13 51 Forehead support; has not left home z Check motor M5_1, 3-14
position and no motor movement replace headrest if necessary 6-19
z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
replace headrest or 6-19
E5 13 52 Forehead support; has left home posi- z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
tion without detected movement replace headrest or 6-19
pulses
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 27

z replace if necessary 6-59
E5 13 53 Forehead support; system does not z Check headrest mechanics,
block within setting range replace if necessary 6-19
E6 13 54 Forehead support is not ready for This error is a sequential fault.
operation
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 57 Error when activating forehead sup- z Unit restart:
port motor Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
z Check headrest mechanics,
E6 13 58 Error when activating forehead sup- z Acknowledge error
port motor
Timeout of FPGA* module on board z Replace board DX1 6-59
DX1.
E4 13 59 Forehead support drive defective z Replace the headrest 6-19
E5 13 60 Temple supports; have not left home z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
position despite movement pulses replace headrest or 6-19
E4 13 61 Temple supports; have not left home z Check motor M5_2, 3-14
position and no motor movement replace headrest if necessary 6-19
z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
z replace if necessary 6-59
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E5 13 62 Temple supports; have left home posi- z Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15
tion without detected movement
båÖäáëÜ
pulses
2.5
E5 13 63 Temple supports; system does not z Check headrest mechanics, replace if neces- 6-19
block within setting range sary
E6 13 64 Temple supports are not ready for This error is a sequential fault.
operation
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 67 Error when activating temple support z Unit restart:
motor Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
z Check headrest mechanics,
E6 13 68 Error when activating temple support z Acknowledge error
motor
Timeout of FPGA* module on board z Replace board DX1 6-59
DX1.
E4 13 69 Forehead support drive defective z Replace the headrest 6-19
E5 13 73 Malfunction of height adjustment z Acknowledge error
during operation z Unit restart:
If the error occurs repeatedly...
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 29

E5 13 83 Error while generating pulse for sen- z Unit restart:
sor Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
If the error occurs repeatedly...
E6 13 87 Error when activating pulse genera- z Unit restart:
tion Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.
*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 14: Digital extension, SIDEXIS XG
båÖäáëÜ
E5 14 01 Cancellation caused by SIDEXIS XG z Check network connection, SIDEXIS installa- 5-48
tion and software version
E7 14 02 Interface version not compatible with z Check software versions of unit (S008.2) and 5-48
SIDEXIS XG. SIDEXIS XG and perform
software update if necessary 1-22
E6 14 03 Inappropriate or incorrect data input z Send in Xab.ini and raw image of last exposure
2.5
from SIDEXIS XG to the Customer Service Center (CSC) (check
the binning setting) and coordinate with CSC
E5 14 04 The network connection was inter- z Acknowledge error and quit service domain
rupted from unit and SIDEXIS end.
z Switch unit OFF and ON again and reselect SI-
Note:
DEXIS.
This error often occurs when SIDEXIS
is selected and the unit is not yet If the error occurs again...
ready for selection.
z Perform network diagnosis in coordination with
the Sirona Customer Service Center and check
the setting of the network card in coordination
with the Sirona CSC if necessary.
(Checksum-offload for patient name with
15 characters for some network cards (prefera-
bly for onboard systems))
z Check and, if necessary, replace network com-
ponents (PC network card, Cat5 cable, hub/
switch/router, media converter, L25/26)
z Check software versions of unit (info screen or 5-48
service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and
E6 14 05 Service of DHCP server is not avail- z Have network configuration of dental practice
able. checked by the administrator in charge
z Ensure proper functioning of the DHCP server
E6 14 06 The bootline of board DX11 had to be z Reconfiguration of network data via sixab-
preassigned with default values. con.exe required.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 31

E6 14 10 Clock signals for sensor image trans- z Acknowledge error and, if possible, check func- 3-25
fer not received on board DX1/DX11 tion at another slot (PAN/CEPH) via test image
(...10). (PAN/CEPH).
E6 14 11 Faulty detection of sensor image

If both test images indicate the error 5-128
transfer data signals on board DX1/
...
DX11; nonrecurring (...11)
- Check image signal on board DX1 6-59
Faulty detection of sensor image (does the image LED on DX1 switch on
E6 14 12 transfer data signals on board DX1/ when the ring cycle starts in the test im-
DX11; recurring (...12) age mode?), replace DX1 if necessary
If only the PAN test image

is not OK...
- Check cable L13 for crushed spots and 6-91
check for kinks and connectors, repair or
- Check board DX1, replace if necessary
- Perform service routine S032.10. 6-59
In this way it can be determined whether 5-126
the fault is stationary or permanent; re-
place sensor or cable if necessary.
6-91
If only the CEPH test image

is not OK...
For E06 14 10 and Ceph exposure:

- Check board DX91 and cables (L37, 3-17
L40), replace if necessary 6-91
In this way it can be determined whether
place sensor or cable if necessary. 6-91
Otherwise:
- Check cable L35/L38 for crushed spots 3-17
and
check for kinks and connectors,
repair or replace if necessary 6-91
- Check board DX1, replace if necessary 6-59
In this way it can be determined whether
place sensor or cable if necessary. 6-91
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 15: Configuration, update
båÖäáëÜ
E7 15 01 Wrong memory modules. If a DRAM memory module is plugged into board
DX11...
z Replace memory module or DX11 6-59
If no DRAM memory module is plugged into board
DX11...
z Replace DX11 6-59
2.5
E7 15 02 Wrong module constellation for this z Refer to list of software versions
unit. z Check to make sure the correct modules are in-
Incompatible modules were used. stalled (e.g. after replacing modules)
z Perform a software update 1-22
z Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center
(CSC)
E7 15 03 Wrong software constellation of mod- z Check software versions of unit (info screen or 5-48
ules. service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and
Perform or repeat software update or down- 1-22

grade if necessary
E6 15 04 Product activation keys invalid or not z Execute service routine S008.4 and confirm the 5-54
available. existing activation profile of the unit.
Note:
Occurs after replacement of tube
assembly (DX6) or DX11 and possibly
after software updates.
See also chapter "Measures following
replacement of boards" starting on
page 6-60.
E6 15 05 Unit serial number invalid or not avail- z Execute service routine S008.3 and confirm or 5-50
able. enter the unit serial number at the unit.
Note:
Occurs during first power-on after
replacement of board DX6 or DX11.
See also chapter "Measures following
replacement of boards" starting on
page 6-60.
E6 15 06 Wrong or invalid manufacturer code z Replace board DX11 6-59
on an module was detected. z Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38
E6 15 07 The user interface or the remote con- z Install the correct user interface or remote
trol is not compatible with the unit. control.
If necessary, obtain a new user interface or re-
i HINWEIS mote control from the manufacturer.
An Orthophos XG5 (Multipad) or XG-
Plus (Easypad) as well as an Ortho-
phos remote control must be installed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 33
E6 15 10 Update file for module is corrupt z Obtain current update file from the Sirona CSC 1-22
and perform software update via the SIRONA
home page
Location 41: Media interface card Board DX41 is omitted as of unit hardware version BA
(see page 1-34).

E6 41 01 General module initialization error z If the error is a software error known to the Siro- 1-22
na Customer Service Center, a software update
(bugfix) must be performed
E6 41 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized z If the error is a software error known to the Siro- 1-22
module storage data na Customer Service Center, a software update
(bugfix) must be performed
Note: z Replace board DX41 6-59
software update
(detected on master side) z Replace board DX41 6-59
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

(detected on slave side)
båÖäáëÜ
z Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
2.5
Note:
E6 41 09 Board DX41 is installed in the unit, but z Perform device configuration via service routine 5-91
not configured S017.9
E7 41 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage z Check operating status of board 3-12
(note LED states)
E7 41 12 Unit is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
z Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-91
via service routine S017.9,
configure correctly if necessary 5-91
messages.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 35

E3 41 20 Release signal applied during power- z Unit restart:
on Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the release
button is not pressed during boot-up.
z Check signal path for short-circuit according to
wiring diagrams (see section "Error analysis of
X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware
revision AG (with board DX41)"),
replace component if necessary
E6 41 21 CAN bus connection to board DX41 z Check cable L17, 3-17
interrupted. replace if necessary 6-91
Board DX41 cannot address board z Check board DX42, 3-12
DX42 via the separate CAN bus con-
nection. replace if necessary 6-59
E6 41 23 Hardware fault at controller input on z See section "Error analysis of X-RAY control 3-18
board DX41. signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG
(with board DX41)"
Board DX41 detects a wrong signal
level of the hardware signal for radia-
tion release.
E6 41 24 Short circuit in radiation release signal z See section "Error analysis of X-RAY control 3-18
path between board DX42 and board signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG
DX41 (cable L17). (with board DX41)"

boards DX11 and DX41 but not on
board DX42.
E6 41 25 X-Ray hardware signal present, z Check cable L17, 3-17
software signal not present replace if necessary 6-91
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 42: Remote control, board DX42
båÖäáëÜ
E6 42 01 General module initialization error z Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-91
Note:
Error generated during module self-
test z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
2.5
E6 42 03 Invalid commanding or control data z Check software version of DX42 (in comparison 5-48
to overall software version) via service routine
Note: S008.2,
Please also observe the causal error z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
replace module DX42 if necessary
software update
(detected on master side) z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
replace module, if necessary
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 37

(detected on slave side) z Check power supply (3.3V) of board DX11,
Note: replace board DX1 or DX11 if necessary
The module was temporarily not 6-59
addressed by the master: z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
- Undervoltage on the master side DX42,
- Procedure error in the software replace module, if necessary
return commanding from the module z Replace board DX42 6-59
Note:
E6 42 08 General fault detected locally on mod- z Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-48
ule (slave side). CAN controller being vice routine S008.2,
reinitialized. perform a software update if necessary 1-22
Note: z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Occurs if software of boards is incom-
patible.
E7 42 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage z Check board DX42 (note LED states) 3-12
z Replace remote control,
see installation instructions
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
z Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-91
messages.
z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E6 42 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
operation DX42,
båÖäáëÜ
z Check connection of remote control,
2.5
i HINWEIS
If the error cannot be eliminated immediately, the
unit can be temporarily reconfigured and operated
with a release button located directly on the unit (see
installation instructions)
E7 42 21 No CAN bus connection. z Check configuration (with or without DX41) via 5-91
DX11 does not start. service routine S017.9,
Note:
Occurs after power-on in the start z Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
screen. DX42,
replace module if necessary
z Check remote control via service routine 17.6, 5-87
configure if necessary
z Start the detail query via Sixabcon
z If DX11 responds...
z Check the signal path to DX42,
repair or replace cable/connector if necessary 6-91
z Replace DX1 6-59
z Replace DX11 if this error persists 6-59
E3 42 30 R key actuated during power-on z Unit restart:
Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the remote
control is not actuated during boot-up.
z Replace remote control,
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 39

E3 42 31 Release button actuated during z see section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY 3-18, 3-22
power-on. control signal path"
The hardware signal for radiation

release is applied on board DX42
when the unit is switched on.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 61: Diaphragm control, board DX61 (not for XG 3/3 PPE, fixed diaphragm)
båÖäáëÜ
z Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
Replace board DX61 or 6-59
2.5
Replace diaphragm unit 6-34
E6 61 03 Invalid commanding or control data If the error occurs during the acceptance/constancy
test:
Note:
This error may also occur in connec- z Check filter offset Bf in the "Reset values" 4-3
tion with other causal error messages. menu. If the value is < -500 (e.g. -502),
Please also observe the causal error repeat the adjustment of the pan symmetry and
message! It appears only after you check the position of the diaphragm.
i HINWEIS
For software versions ≤ V02.22, the filter offset value
must be < 500 (e.g. ± 450).
If the error occurs in the normal mode:

Note: z Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
software update Replace board DX61 or 6-59
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 41

(detected on master side) z Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
Note:
(note LED states)
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
2.5
z Replace diaphragm unit 6-34
E5 61 15 Drive overtemperature z Allow unit to cool down.

Can occur after frequent diaphragm z Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
travel, e.g. during demo operation at a
fair Replace board DX61 or 6-59
E5 61 20 Horizontal motor malfunction during z Allow unit to cool down.
operation
If the error occurs again... 3-12
Note:
z Check board DX61, replace if necessary
Can occur after frequent diaphragm
travel, e.g. during demo operation at a Replace board DX61 or 6-59
fair Replace diaphragm unit 6-34
E5 61 21 Horizontal motor limit switch error z Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, re- 3-15
place if necessary 6-49
z Perform diaphragm adjustment 4-3
E5 61 22 Horizontal motor movement error z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
If the error occurs again... 3-12
z Check board DX61, replace if necessary
E5 61 30 Vertical motor malfunction during z Allow unit to cool down.
operation
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 43

E5 61 31 Vertical motor limit switch error z Check light barrier V61_2 and connectors, re- 3-15
place if necessary 6-49
E5 61 32 Vertical motor movement error z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E5 61 40 Filter motor malfunction during opera- z Allow unit to cool down.
tion
E5 61 41 Filter motor limit switch error z Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, 3-15

z Replace diaphragm unit 6-34
E5 61 42 Filter motor movement error z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E5 61 50 Sensor positioning drive malfunction z Allow unit to cool down
during operation
båÖäáëÜ
z Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS
(V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary
z Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for 6-43
smooth and easy movement, replace sensor
holder if necessary
2.5
E5 61 51 Sensor positioning drive limit switch z Check light barrier V61_4, 3-15
error replace if necessary 6-49
z Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS
(V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary
z Check extension cord to light barrier, replace if
necessary
z Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for 6-43
smooth and easy movement, replace sensor
holder if necessary
E5 61 52 Sensor positioning drive movement z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
error
z Check to make sure TSA transport safety de-
vice has been removed (see TSA installation in-
structions), remove if necessary
z Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for
smooth and easy movement,
replace sensor holder if necessary 6-43
E5 61 53 Limit switch sensor adjustment z Check light barrier V61_4 and 3-15
for TSA defective connector, 3-17
E5 61 54 Limit switch sensor adjustment z Check light barrier V61_5 and 3-15
for PAN/CEPH defective connector, 3-17
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 45

E1 61 60 Voltage error on DX61, z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
40 V or 28 V
Note: z Check height adjustment (soft start),
If several drives are operated simulta-
neously under unfavorable circum- replace DX1 if necessary 6-59
stances, this may cause voltages to z Check voltages at X501 on board DX61 accord-
fall below their minimum tolerances. ing to wiring diagrams,
replace diaphragm unit if necessary 6-34
z Check voltage path from DX32 to DX1 (X102)
according to wiring diagrams,
replace component if necessary
E6 61 70 Error during the configuration of the If this error occurs after board DX11 has been
diaphragm unit replaced:
z Check configuration of diaphragm unit via 5-103,
service routine S017.17 5-105
Configure correctly if necessary 5-103,
5-105
If this error occurs after the diaphragm unit has
been replaced:
z Check order number of inserted diaphragm unit
Replace diaphragm unit if necessary 6-34,

6-38
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 71 (XG5/3/3 PPE): Multipad/Board DX71
båÖäáëÜ
z Check board DX71 or 6-59
2.5
replace Multipad 6-21
Note: z Check board DX71 or 6-59
software update replace Multipad 6-21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 47

The module was temporarily not
addressed by the master: – If 3.3 V are present, replace board DX11
- Undervoltage on the master side
6-59
- Master (DX11) receives no – If 3.3 V are not present, replace board DX1 6-59
Note:
z replace Multipad 6-21
E7 71 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage z Check board DX71 3-12
This error is a sequential fault.
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E6 71 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during z Note error message on remote control (DX42)
operation. and check log memory (via extended details)
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E7 71 21 No CAN bus connection. z Start the detail query via Sixabcon
DX11 does not start.
båÖäáëÜ
If DX11 responds...
Note: z Check signal path to DX71,
Occurs after power-on in the start
screen. repair or replace cable/connector if necessary 6-91
z Replace DX1 6-59
2.5
z Replace DX11 6-59
E3 71 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur- z Unit restart:
ing power-on Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the Multipad is
E3 71 31 Forehead support key pressed during
not actuated during boot-up.
power-on
E3 71 32 Temple support keys actuated during If the error occurs again...
power-on z Replace board DX71 or
6-59
E3 71 33 Light localizer key actuated during Multipad
power-on 6-21
E3 71 34 Test key actuated during power-on

E3 71 35 Return key actuated during power-on
E3 71 36 Service key actuated during power-on
E3 71 37 Memory key actuated during power-
on
E3 71 38 Program selection key actuated during
power-on
E3 71 39 Radiation time key actuated during
power-on
E3 71 40 kV/mA key actuated during power-on
E3 71 41 Patient symbol key actuated during
power-on
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 49
Location 81, zz = 1-23: Board DX81, pan slot

E6 81 01 PAN z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
General error during module initializa- means of a software update is possible and per-
tion form such an update if necessary.
z Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
E6 81 02 PAN z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
Invalid system data or uninitialized means of a software update is possible and per-
module storage data form such an update if necessary.
E6 81 03 PAN z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Invalid commanding or control data z If the error is a software error known to the Siro- 1-22
na Customer Service Center (CSC), a software
Note: update (bugfix) must be performed
Data transfer error or dialog error to z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
module (master side) Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 81 05 PAN z Repeat software update 1-22
Data transfer error or dialog error to z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
bootloader of module z Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
Note:
software update
Module failed in TTP* z Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
TTP* timeout error z Check cable L13, 3-17
(detected on slave side) replace if necessary 6-91
Note: z Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
The module was temporarily not point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
addressed by the master: – If 3.3 V are present, replace board DX11 6-59
2.5
– If 3.3 V are not present, replace board DX1 6-59
Note:
General fault detected locally on mod- z Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-48
ule (slave side). CAN controller being vice routine S008.2,
E7 81 10 PAN z Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
sor), replace sensor if necessary
Module is stuck in bootloader stage
E7 81 12 PAN This error is a sequential fault.
Unit is not ready for operation z Unit restart:

Switch unit ON.
messages.
E5 81 13 PAN z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Error when writing to EEPROM z Perform a software update 1-22

Stored data may be lost z Check log memory (via extended details)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 51

E6 81 20 PAN z Check with the Sirona Customer Service Cen-
ter (CSC) for SIDEXIS specifications
The sensor type on the panoramic unit
z Check version compatibility of XG software and 1-16
is not compatible with SIDEXIS speci-
Sidexis,
fications
z Pull sensor out of slot and plug it back in, repeat
procedure
E7 81 21 PAN z Perform a software update 1-22
File system error on DX81P z Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
E6 81 23 PAN z Check cable L13, replace if necessary 3-17
6-91
Sensor in pan slot active on CAN bus,
but no hardware detection z Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1 3-12
(hardware detection of sensor)
z Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
z Check connector X500 on DX1,
replace DX1 or DX11 if necessary 6-59
z Replace board DX1 or DX11 6-59
E5 81 24 PAN z Check cable L13, 3-17
Sensor in PAN slot not detected.
z Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1 3-12
(hardware detection of sensor)
z Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
z Check plug X500 on DX1,
E5 81 25 PAN z Perform a software update 6-59
Error while synchronizing image data If the error occurs again...
E5 81 27 PAN z Check cable L13, 3-17
Voltage error detected on sensor. replace if necessary 6-91
(CCD voltages on board DX81P) z Check plug X500 on DX1,
Note: replace DX1 if necessary 6-59
If this error occurs in connection with
other causal error messages (e.g. E6
6160, E6 9150), take appropriate
action
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

E5 81 28 PAN z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
båÖäáëÜ
Invalid data at start of exposure. If the error occurs again...
Sidexis,
z Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for
2.5
the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 53
Location 81, zz = 51-73: DX 81, ceph slot

E6 81 51 Ceph z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
General error during module initializa- means of a software update is possible and per-
tion form such an update if necessary.
z Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
E6 81 52 Ceph z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
Invalid system data or uninitialized means of a software update is possible and per-
module storage data form such an update if necessary.
E6 81 53 Ceph z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
Invalid commanding or control data z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
Data transfer error or dialog error to z Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-22
module (master side) Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 81 55 Ceph z Repeat software update 1-22
Data transfer error or dialog error to z Checking the CAN bus 3-6
bootloader of module z Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
Note:
software update
Module failed in TTP* z Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
TTP* timeout error z Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
(detected on slave side) point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
– If 3.3 V are present, replace board DX11 6-59
Note:
The module was temporarily not
addressed by the master: – If 3.3 V are not present, replace board DX1 6-59
2.5
Note:
General fault detected locally on mod- z Check software versions via info screen or 5-48
ule (slave side). CAN controller being service routine S008.2,
E7 81 60 Ceph z Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen- 3-12
sor)
Module is stuck in bootloader stage
E7 81 62 Ceph This error is a sequential fault.
Unit is not ready for operation z Unit restart:

Switch unit ON.
messages.
E5 81 63 Ceph z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Error when writing to EEPROM If the error occurs again...
Note: z Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

Stored data may be lost
E7 81 71 Ceph z Perform a software update 1-22
File system error on DX81C
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 55

E6 81 73 Ceph z Check cable L35/L38, 3-17
Sensor in ceph slot active on CAN replace if necessary 6-91
bus, but no hardware detection z Check plug X500 on board DX1,
z Check Ceph sensor holder,
E5 81 74 Ceph z Check cables L35 and L38, 3-17
Sensor in ceph slot not detected. replace if necessary 6-91
z Check connector X503 on board DX1,
z Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-47
E5 81 75 Ceph z Perform a software update 1-22
Error while synchronizing image data If the error occurs again...
E5 81 77 Ceph z Check cable L35/L38, 3-17
Voltage error detected on sensor. replace if necessary 6-91
(CCD voltages on board DX81P) z Check plug X503 on board DX1,
Note: replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59
If this error occurs in connection with
z Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-47
other causal error messages (e.g. E6
6160, E6 9150), take appropriate z Perform a software update 1-22
action z Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
E5 81 78 Ceph z Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Invalid data at start of exposure. If the error occurs again...

Sidexis,
z Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for
the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Location 91: Cephalometer, board DX91
båÖäáëÜ
2.5
module storage data
software update
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 57

Note:
(note LED states)
z Check DX91, 3-12
z Unit restart:
Switch unit ON.
messages.
E3 91 13 Error when writing to EEPROM z Complete unit adjustment 4-3
Note: incl. check of center position of Ceph scan via 5-135,
Stored data may be lost service routines S034.4 and S034.5, 5-139
readjust if necessary
E5 91 15 Drive overtemperature z Allow unit to cool down.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

z Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor
M91_3 for smooth and easy running,
båÖäáëÜ
E5 91 16 Motor control timeout (M91_2/3) z Replace board DX91 6-59
E5 91 20 Sensor drive malfunction during oper- z Allow unit to cool down.
ation
2.5
z Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor
M91_3 for smooth and easy running,
z Check light barrier V91_2, 3-15
E5 91 21 Sensor drive, opposite light barrier replace if necessary 6-49
reached prematurely z Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),
E5 91 22 Sensor drive timeout z Check motor M91_3 incl. cable and connector,
z Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),
E5 91 30 Secondary diaphragm drive malfunc- z Allow unit to cool down.
tion during operation
z Check motor M91_2 incl. cable and connector,
E5 91 31 Secondary diaphragm drive, opposite z Check light barrier V91_2, 3-15
light barrier reached prematurely replace if necessary 6-49
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 59

E5 91 32 Secondary diaphragm drive timeout z Check motor M91_2,
E6 91 40 Rotary table pot compensation not yet z Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-22
performed higher
z Replace DX91, 6-59
E6 91 41 Ear plug pot compensation not yet z Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-22
performed higher
z Replace DX91 6-59
E6 91 42 Nose support pot compensation not z Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-22
yet performed higher
z Replace DX91 6-59
E1 91 50 Voltage error on DX91, z Check height adjustment (soft start),
40V or 28V replace DX1 if necessary 6-59
Note: z Check cables L36, L39 and adapter, 3-17
If several drives are operated simulta- replace if necessary 6-91
neously under unfavorable circum-
stances, this may cause voltages to z Check voltages at X103 on board DX91 accord-
fall below their minimum tolerances. ing to wiring diagrams, replace DX91 if neces- 6-59
sary
z Check boards DX1 and DX91, 3-12
If multiple boards report errors...
z Check DX32, 3-12
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 2 2.6 List of available service routines
2.6 List of available service routines
Routine Description Required... see page
båÖäáëÜ
S001 Radiation without rotary movement: z for tube assembly test and testing kV/mA levels 5-21
Fixed radiation time of 14.0 s
i HINWEIS
This routine enables the service engineer to release
radiation without having to attain exposure readi-
ness for the entire system.
2.6
S002 Radiation without rotary movement: z for system test, final testing, tube voltage mea- 5-23
Max. radiation time selectable surement, reproducibility measurement, equiv-
alent dose measurement
Test step 1:
Radiation from any position;
last primary diaphragm setting
Test step 3:
Primary diaphragm opened fully
Test step 4:
Step filter in beam path;
Primary diaphragm symmetrically
widened to PAN setting
S005 General X-ray tube assembly service z after error messages or component 5-28
replacement
Test step 2:
Automatic alignment of preheating
(board DX6) with display of setpoint
values
Test step 4:
Fan test (board DX6)
Test step 5:
Temperature sensor test (board DX6)
Test step 6 (from V02.22): z only if expressly requested by the customer! 5-34
Switch off the pulse/pause monitoring
VORSICHT
The execution of this service routine is irrevers-
ible. The system is operated beyond its specifica-
tions afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube as-
sembly failure.
This entails a loss of warranty for the X-ray tube
assembly!
The performance of this service function can be
proven by Sirona following a system failure.
Test step 7 (from V02.27): z only if expressly requested by the customer! 5-37
Switch tube assembly fan to continu-
ous operation VORSICHT
The execution of this service routine is irrevers-
ibly documented on the tube assembly!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 61
2.6 List of available service routines Tab 2

S007 Error logging z after error messages 5-40
Test step 1:
Display error logging memory
Test step 2:
Clear error logging memory
Test step 5 (from V02.27): z only after consulting with the Sirona Customer
Activation of CAN bus logging in the Service Center!
miniweb
S008 Update service z for checking the configuration 5-48
Test step 2:
Display of module software version
statuses
Test step 3: z after error messages
Input/confirmation of
unit serial number
Test step 4
(not for XG3 and XG3PPE):
Initializing the function activation
S009 Flash file system z after error messages 5-56
Test step 4:
Format flash file system
S012 CAN bus service z on suspicion of unstable CAN bus 5-59
(V02.27 or z in case of accumulated error messages EX yy
Test step 2:
higher) Query of CAN status register of mod- 12; Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07, Ex yy 03
ules z not suitable as an accompanying measure e.g.
"check connector of CAN bus" or "check bus ter-
minations"
Test step 3: z to be executed prior to service routine S012.2 if
Query of CAN status register of mod- required
ules
Test step 4: z in case of sporadic failures of modules on CAN
Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of bus (after Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07,
modules Ex yy 08, Ex yy 12)
z as accompanying measure during check of
plugs (wiggle) for firm seating
S014 Rotation motor service z for electromechanical problems with the ring 5-67
(V02.28 or motor or the ring rotation system
Test step 1:
higher) Travel of rotational drive to the Pan
home position
Test step 2:
Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph
home position
Test step 3:
Free travel of rotational drive
Test step 4:
Display of light barrier signals of rota-
tional drive
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

S015 Actuator service z for electromechanical problems with the actua- 5-74
tors or the actuator movement
båÖäáëÜ
(V02.28 or Test step 5:
higher) Functional test of actuators 1 + 2
S017 Configuration service z for changing the configuration 5-77
Unit ID
Test step 2:
Configure hardware version
2.6
Test step 3:
Select the country group code
Test step 4 (XGPlus only):
Select language index within lan-
guage set
Test step 5 (XGPlus only):
Select language set index within lan-
guage set
Test step 6: z for installation and removal of remote control
Activate remote control
Test step 8: z for changing the configuration
Select kV/mA level ID
Test step 9 (V02.28 and higher): z for software updates and replacement of DX11
Configuration of unit with or without
board DX41
Test step 10 (V02.28 or higher): z for replacement of board DX11 or the headrest
Configuration of headrest
Test step 11 z for changing the configuration
(for XG 5 only):
Select image format
Test step 12 z At the customer's request: Switch the preview
(V02.22 or higher, XGPlus only): image ON and OFF (after update to version
Activate/deactivate the preview image V02.22)
Test step 13 (V02.22 or higher, z At the customer's request: Enabling or disabling
XGPlus full version only): the welcome screen (after update to V02.22)
Enable/disable the welcome screen
Test step 14 (V02.22 or higher, z At the customer's request or compliant to legal
XGPlus full version only): regulations: Configure the appearance of the
Activate/deactivate certain lines of the welcome screen.
welcome screen
Test step 15 (V02.25 or higher, z At the customer's request: Switch the acoustic
XGPlus full version only): signal for the end of exposure ON or OFF.
Activate/deactivate the acoustic signal
for the end of exposure
Test step 17 z After replacing the diaphragm:
(V02.32 and higher): – RöV FRG: Configuration of standard for ac-
ceptance/constancy test
– Worldwide: Check/accept the diaphragm
configuration
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 63

S017 Test step 18
(V02.28 or higher, for XGPlus only): VORSICHT
in preparation! This routine must not be selected, since it would
cause malfunctions of the unit!
Test step 22 z Configuration of display of remaining exposures

(V02.28 or higher, for XG 3 PPE after power-on
only):
Configuration of PPE display
Test step 23 z Configuration of warning level for display of re-
(V02.28 or higher, for XG 3 PPE maining exposures after an exposure
only):
Configuration of warning level for PPE
display
S018 Set travel height z if room height is lower than 2.27 m 5-109
(2.30 m with floor stand)
Test step 2:
Limit maximum travel height
Test step 3:
Undo limit of maximum travel height
setting
Test step 4: z Check of the sensor system for the height ad-
Test of the height adjustment sensor justment (upper and lower limit switches, cor-
system rection switch, pulse counter)
Test step 5 (V02.27 and higher): z if the minimum travel height must be limited
Limit minimum travel height
Test step 6 (V02.27 and higher):
Undo limit of minimum travel height
setting
S020 Service for temple support z in case of complaints regarding the allocation of 5-118
the temple support distances to the jaw widths
Test step 1
(V02.22 or higher, XGPlus only):
Activate/deactivate switching thresh-
olds of the temple supports
S021 Diaphragm service: motor-driven dia- z following replacement of diaphragm unit 5-121
phragm
Test step 1:
Initialization of diaphragm axis
Test step 3: z Important for TSA Ready units:
Function test of after replacing the sensor holder
TSA sensor adjustment
S032 Test function for sensor in PAN slot z for troubleshooting HSI problems 5-126
(E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)
Test step 10 (from V02.27):
Test function for sensor in PAN slot
S033 Test of CEPH image path without z for troubleshooting HSI problems 5-130
SIDEXIS (E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)
Test step 10 (V02.27 or higher,

not for XG 3 / 3 PPE):
Test of CEPH image path without
SIDEXIS
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

S034 Service for the digital cephalometer z after replacing ceph module 5-134
båÖäáëÜ
Test step 4: z for adjustment problems (only after consulting
Calibrate center position of ceph scan the Sirona Customer Service Center
(sensor side)
Test step 5:
Calibrate center position of ceph scan
(diaphragm side)
2.6
Test step 6: z to repack the cephalometer
Move cephalometer to packing posi-
tion
Test step 7 (for XGPlus only): z for PAN units up to serial number 20056,
Set the ring type for PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104
Test step 8: z at customer's request
User-specific definition of shadowing
limit for C1 and C2
Test step 9: z at customer's request
User-specific definition of shadowing
limit for C3 and C3F
S037 Network service, PC service z for problems with exposure readiness 5-151
Test step 1: z for changing the network configuration
Display network data
Test step 2:
Reset IP address
Test step 3:
Toggle DHCP and UDP boot mode
Test step 4:
Manual input of IP address, default
gateway address and subnet mask
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 65
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
3 Troubleshooting
Tab 3
Contents
3.1 Error logging memory..............................................3 – 4

3.1.1 Example of error logging data .............................. 3 – 5
3.2 Check the CAN bus.................................................3 – 6

3.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic
function of board DX1........................................... 3 – 9
3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus ....................... 3 – 10
3.3 Checking the boards .............................................3 – 12

3.3.1 Checking board DX32 ........................................ 3 – 13
3.4 Checking the motors .............................................3 – 14
3.5 Checking the light barriers ....................................3 – 15
3.6 Device leakage current too high............................3 – 16
3.7 Checking the cables ..............................................3 – 17

(with board DX41) .................................................3 – 18
3.8.1 Error and help messages with remote
control installed .................................................. 3 – 18
3.8.2 Error messages without installed
remote control .................................................... 3 – 20
3.8.3 Error messages with and without
installed remote control ...................................... 3 – 21

(without board DX41) ............................................3 – 22
3.9.1 Error and help messages with remote
control installed .................................................. 3 – 22
3.9.2 Error messages without installed
remote control .................................................... 3 – 23
3.9.3 Error messages with and without
installed remote control ...................................... 3 – 24
3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images ...............3 – 25
59 38 399 D3352
3–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3
3 Troubleshooting
DANGER
Shock hazard! It is essential that you switch the X-ray unit OFF before
replacing any components!
CAUTION
– Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.
– Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to
– Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
– Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be
taken to check a measurement.
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for han-
dling printed circuit boards (ESD).
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity before

touching any boards.
CAUTION
CAN bus cable: When unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential to unplug
the power supply as well.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3–3
3.1 Error logging memory Tab 3
3.1 Error logging memory

The error logging memory is a component of the EXTENDED DETAILS
(see section 1.10 on page 3-4).
System time Entry type Entry data
Data which might be expected to occur in the logging memory are explained
below to help you interpret them better:
59 38 399 D3352
3–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.1 Error logging memory
3.1.1 Example of error logging data
System time 2006-03-06, 20:13:02 : System time (clock on DX11)
Entry type [Message] : General system event

[Error] : Error event
[Error Sidexis] : Network error event
[Stringname] : Free status texts
[Stringsegment] : Additional data (string names)
Entry data [Message] Recording started : Beginning of a recording

Value: 9000 : Sequence ID of recording
Recording stopped : End of a recording
Recording cancelled : Recording cancellation
3.1
Logbook started : Corresponds to power-on of unit
Image state switched to Released : Recording has been delivered to
and confirmed by SIDEXIS
Other entry data which document the occurrence of a rescue event include:
– Image state switched to Rescue
– Rescue request Sidexis Error
– Rescue request Sidexis TrackEpilogue
– Rescue request Sidexis Timeout
These entry data may also occur after "Recording stopped" or "Cancel" and
indicate an exceptional circumstance. You can supply important information
for error diagnosis in coordination with the Sirona Customer Service Center.
Entry data [Error] E6 07 06 : Error code

ERR_DX7_TTP_LOST : Cleartext display of error
Entry data [Error Sidexis] SidErr: ERR_SOCKET_ERROR : Details on

network error
(for Sirona only)
SockErr: : Details on
network error
(for Sirona only)
Entry data [Stringname] Key Act : Activation transaction

Key Ok : Activation transaction
Counter (XG 3 PPE) : Current counter reading
Entry data [Stringsegment] 7YFWDUFV- : e.g. activation or

E4MMRJBW confirmation code
(for activation transaction)
061-00133 : e.g. counter (ID counter reading)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3–5
3.2 Check the CAN bus Tab 3
3.2 Check the CAN bus
CAUTION
When unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential that the voltage supply is ap-
plied at the module!
Unit HW version BA and higher:

< 50 Ω
Check jumpers on board DX42 (if present)
for correct setting, see section 6.20.4.
Measure ohmic resistance between
Are the jumpers plugged in correctly?
pins 1 and 2 of connector X310 on
board DX1 (unit HW version < AG)
or the measuring pins CAN H and yes no
CAN L (unit HW version >= AG)
120/0 Ω Insert jumper

correctly.
Fault in the electric CAN bus 60 Ω Continue on page 3-8
connection
Only for unit hardware versions ≥ BA:

Check cable L117 and manual Plug in L117/manual release A2
release A2 (without remote control). no (unit HW version ≥ BA) properly, or replace
Are cable L117 and manual release if necessary.
A2 properly connected?
yes
Check jumpers for correct position

on board DX1, see section 5.13.1.
no Plug in jumpers correctly.
• Are the jumpers plugged in
correctly?
yes
Cabling fault in the connec-

tors or modules
Check CAN plug connections from

board DX1 to the connected mod-
ules!
no Make a plug connection.
• Are the plug connections OK?
(see also service routine S012.4
(LED test), page 5-65)
yes
Continue on page 3-7
59 38 399 D3352
3–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.2 Check the CAN bus
from page 3-6
Fault in cabling
or in modules
Find defective component or faulty

cable by process of elimination.
Is a substitute cable available? no
3.2
Cyclical test with
yes bypassing of components
Cyclical test using

the same substitute cable Bypass the individual bus outputs to
the modules in succession and mea-
sure ohmic resistance between pins 1
and 2 of connector X310 on board
DX1 (unit HW version < AG) or the
Connect a substitute cable to each measuring pins CAN H and CAN L
module in succession and measure (unit HW version >= AG) in each case.
ohmic resistance between pins 1 and
2 of connector X310 on board DX1 Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω mea-
(unit HW version < AG) or the measur- sured in any particular constellation?
ing pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW
version >= AG) each time.
Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω mea-

no no yes
sured in any particular constellation?
yes Replace board DX1.
Replace the defective cable in the Replace the defective cable in the
corresponding signal path. corresponding signal path.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3–7
from page 3-6
Check optical CAN bus connection L6

to board DX6.
("Wiggle test“ or substitute cable) yes
Fault on optical
• Can the fault be traced to this
CAN bus connection
connection?
no
Replace optical label L6.
Unstable CAN bus or
sporadic faults
Test connection quality of CAN bus

with service routine S012.2
(see page 5-60).
To do this, display the fault status of all
modules in succession. no
• Is there any information on bus

faults in the status registers of one
or more modules?
yes
Defective
connection quality
Check individual signal paths and con-

nectors. ("Wiggle test" or see also ser-
vice routine S012.4 (LED test),
page 5-65). Contact the
no SIRONA Customer
• Can a CAN error message or fail- Service Center (CSC).
ure of the LED flashing be caused
for one or more modules?
yes
Replace the corresponding

connectors, cables or modules.
59 38 399 D3352
3–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
3.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic

function of board DX1
Board DX1 features a diagnostic function for diagnosing malfunctions of the
CAN bus via LEDs V700 and V701 (see wiring diagrams). The following table
indicates the operating status of the CAN bus and the recommended error
correction measures:
V700 V701 Operating status of CAN bus Error correction measures

Slow flashing Slow flashing CAN bus OK Not required
Fast flashing Off CAN error, no communication with z Check cabling
board DX7, i.e. no display of error z Check CAN jumper
messages (see section 3.2.2)
Fast flashing Fast flashing CAN error, no physical communica- z Disconnect CAN cables succes-
tion with CAN bus possible; there is sively (set jumper to inner posi-
probably a short circuit in the CAN tion!) until the CAN bus functions
cable or on the board of a module again (V700 and V701 flash
slowly)
3.2
z Replace defective module
Off Fast flashing CAN error, CAN bus TTP* disturbed z Disconnect CAN cables succes-
by defective, constantly transmitting sively (set jumper to inner posi-
board (bus-heavy) tion!) until the CAN bus functions
again (V700 and V701 flash
slowly)
z Replace defective module
Off Off System did not power up (DX11) z Switch unit OFF and ON again
and wait until end of power-up
time
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3–9
3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus

The jumpers are located on board DX1 at sockets X302, X303, X306, X307,
X309, X500 and X503 (see also wiring diagrams).
If a cable is plugged into the socket, the corresponding jumpers must be set
to the outer position. If no cable is plugged in, the jumpers must be set to the
inner position.
If a jumper is not set to the inner position with a cable plugged in, the CAN bus
is interrupted at this location. Modules located behind this location can no
longer be connected to the CAN bus, and therefore do not function.
Up to unit hardware version AG
Socket, Socket, DX1

e.g. X500 e.g. X309 DX81
RS X503
SUB_D Ceph
sensor
Jumper outside Jumper inside

DX81
Module con- Module not con- X500
Pan
SUB_D
nected, i.e. connected, i.e. con- sensor
nector plugged in nector not
plugged in
DX91
X309
Jumper
RJ45 Ceph
sensor
Jumper X307 Optional

SUB_D connection
DX61*
X306
RJ45 Dia-
phragm
DX41 DX42
X303
RJ45
Inter- Remote
face control
X302 DX7
RJ45
Display
RS
DX11
PowerPC
* Connector not plugged in for XG 3/3 PPE,

Jumper must be connected to socket X306 inside for XG 3 / 3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Unit HW version BA and higher

Socket, Socket, DX1

e.g. X500 e.g. X309 DX81
RS X503
SUB_D Ceph
sensor
Jumper outside Jumper inside

DX81
Module con- Module not con- X500
Pan
SUB_D
nected, i.e. connected, i.e. con- sensor
nector plugged in nector not
plugged in
DX91
X309
Jumper
RJ45 Ceph
sensor
3.2
Jumper X307 Optional
SUB_D connection
DX61*
X306
RJ45 Dia-
phragm
DX42
X303 X103
RJ45 SUB_D
Remote
control
Corner
interface
X103
SUB_D
A2
X302 DX7
RJ45
Display
RS
DX11
PowerPC
*) Connector not plugged in for XG 3 / 3 PPE,

Jumper must be connected to socket X306 insidefor XG 3 / 3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 11
3.3 Checking the boards Tab 3
3.3 Checking the boards
Check operating status of board.

Visual inspection:
• Is the board intact? Locate board (DX1 or other
• Do the LEDs indicate normal operation? connected board) or component
no
(see table below) (e.g. cable) causing fault/error;
replace component if necessary.
Measure voltages:
• Are the voltage levels OK?
(see wiring diagrams)
yes
Insert replacement board and Board is OK!

check unit functioning. no Continue troubleshooting acc. to
• Is the unit functioning properly? error list (see section 2.5).
yes
Replace board or module,

see section 6.
Important LEDs on the boards (see also wiring diagrams)
Board LEDs Normal operation Malfunction Bootloader

DX1 V100 lit not lit
V101 lit not lit
V109 lit not lit
V110 lit not lit
V610 lit not lit
DX6 V1 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V203 lit not lit
V501 lit not lit
V101 lit not lit
V103 lit not lit
V107 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
DX41* V103 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V202 lit not lit
V103 lit not lit
V501 lit not lit
* Board DX41 is not installed in units with HW vers. BA and higher (from Nov. 2006).
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.3 Checking the boards
3.3.1 Checking board DX32
Check operating status of board. If board DX32 is visibly

no damaged, replace board;
Visual inspection:
see section 6.20.
• Is the board intact?
yes
Unit hardware version < BA:

• Are LEDs V132 and V133 on board DX32 lit?
Unit hardware version ≥ BA:
• Are LEDs V111 and V112 on board DX32 lit?
no yes
3.3
• Are LEDs V100 and V101
on board DX1 lit?
Measure voltages on DX1:
AA107/AA108 = 28 V ± 10 % yes Board DX32 is OK.
AA109/AA108 = 40 V ± 10 %
• Are the voltage levels OK?
and are the LEDs lit?
no
Check cable L4: Replace cable L4,

no
• Is the cable OK? see section 6.21
yes Check fuses on board DX32:

• Switch the unit OFF.
Check automatic circuit breakers F101 Wait 7 minutes (el. discharge).
and F102 on board DX32. • Check fuses F100 and F103
no
(HW status up to AG),
• Have the circuit breakers tripped? replace if necessary
• Switch unit ON and check
yes function.
Is the unit functioning properly?
Press automatic circuit breakers and

test unit function.
• Is the unit functioning properly? no
yes
Replace board DX32,

The fault is corrected! see section 6.20.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 13
3.4 Checking the motors Tab 3
3.4 Checking the motors
Check operating status of motors.

Visual inspection: Replace the motor and/or fix the plug
• Is the motor intact? no
connections.
• Are the plug connections OK?
yes
Temporarily install replacement motor Motor is OK!

and check unit function. no Continue troubleshooting according
• Is the unit functioning properly? to error list (see section 2.5).
yes
Replace motor, see section 6.2 or

section 6.3.
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.5 Checking the light barriers
3.5 Checking the light barriers
Is the plug connection between the Clean plug; in case of a defect,

no fix or replace defective component,
light barrier and the board OK?
see section 6.
yes
Actuate light barrier manually and

Is a replacement light barrier check signal change on pin 3 of light
no
available? barrier connector:
Pin Signal
yes 1 GND
2 3.3 V or 5 V
3 Signal
3.5
Temporarily install replacement 4 GND
light barrier and check unit
functioning. Note:
• Is the unit functioning properly? When inspecting the light barrier,
check to see whether ambient light
can influence its function.
yes
• Are the signals OK?
Replace light barrier,

see section 6.19.
no
Replace light barrier,

see section 6.19.
no yes
Light barrier is OK!

Continue troubleshooting acc. to
error list (see section 2.5).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 15
3.6 Device leakage current too high Tab 3
3.6 Device leakage current too high
Pull tube assembly cable L3 off of Check the cable shields

connector X3 on board DX6 and per- (see section 7.12) and check the
form measurement of leakage current cables for visible signs of damage.
no
according to sect. 7.14. • Are the cable shields and
• Is the leakage current OK? cables OK?
yes no yes
Replace tube assembly, Replace board DX32,

see section 6.14. see section 6.1.2.
Fix cable shields and/or replace any

defective cables.
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.7 Checking the cables
3.7 Checking the cables
i NOTE
You can use a standard Cat5 cable as a test cable for L8*, L10, L12, L40
and L37. Caution! This cable must not be permanently installed.
i NOTE
Most cables have the same plug at both ends and are connected 1:1
(see also section "1.12 Cabling overview').
Clean plug; in case of a defect,

Is the cable plug connection OK? no fix plug, replace cable if necessary,
see section 6.21.
yes
3.7
Repair shield,
For shielded cables: no replace cable if necessary,
Is the cable shield connection OK? see section 6.21.
yes
If a substitute cable is available,

temporarily connect it and Locate module causing fault and
check unit functioning. no replace component,
see section 6.
• Is the unit functioning properly?
yes
Replace cable, see section 6.21.
* up to unit hardware version AG
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 17
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG

(with board DX41)
3.8.1 Error and help messages with remote control

installed
E3 42 31 + E3 13 40 + E3 41 20
occur in combination after the unit Was the release but- Switch the unit OFF
ton actuated during yes
is switched ON with the door and then ON again.
contact closed. switch ON? Make sure that the
release button is not
actuated during
switch-ON.
Do the error messages

recur?
no yes
Short circuit in the coiled cable of the release

button or on the membrane keyboard of the
remote control:
• Replace release button
• Replace remote control
E3 42 31
occurs individually after the unit is Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled
switched ON. cable of release button or on membrane keyboard of the remote
control:
• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA)
• Replace remote control (see section 6.20)
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG
E3 41 20
occurs individually after the unit is Door contact yes • Close door contact
switched ON. open? • Switch unit OFF and ON again
Does the error message recur?
no yes
Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and DX42

during switch-ON:
• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.21)
• Replace remote control
• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.20)
3.8
E3 41 24
occurs individually during Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and DX42
operation of unit. during switch-ON:
E6 13 43
occurs individually during Was the door • Acknowledge error
operation of unit. opened during the yes message with R key
exposure? • Close door contact
• Repeat the exposure
no
• Check door contact, repair if necessary

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 19
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG
H321
is triggered at start of exposure. Door contact yes • Close door contact
open? • Start exposure again
Is the error message displayed

again?
no yes

3.8.2 Error messages without installed remote

control
E3 13 40 + E3 41 20
occur in combination after the unit Was the release but- Switch the unit OFF
is switched ON. and then ON again.
switch ON? Make sure that the
actuated during
switch-ON.

recur?
no yes
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:

• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA)
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG
3.8.3 Error messages with and without installed

remote control

E3 41 20 Faulty detection of release signal by z Replace board DX41 6-59
DX41 processor when the unit is
switched ON.
E6 41 23 Faulty detection of release signal by z Replace board DX41 6-59
DX41 processor during operation of
the unit.
E6 41 25 The DX41 detects no release signal z Replace board DX41 6-59
when the exposure is started.
E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between z Replace cable L17 6-91
boards DX11 and DX41 during z Replace board DX41 6-59
switch-ON.
z Replace board DX1
3.8
z Replace board DX11
E6 13 41 Release signal missing on z Replace cable L17 6-91
board DX11 at start of exposure. z Replace board DX41 6-59
z Replace board DX1
E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between z Replace cable L17 6-91
boards DX11 and DX41 during opera- z Replace board DX41 6-59
tion of the unit.
z Replace board DX1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 21
3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher

(without board DX41)
3.9.1 Error and help messages with remote control

installed
E3 42 31 + E3 13 40
occur in combination after the unit Was release button Switch the unit OFF
A2 actuated during yes
is switched ON with the door and then ON again.
contact closed. switch-ON? Make sure that release
button A2 is not actuat-
ed during switch-ON.

recur?
no yes
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button A2 or

on membrane keyboard of remote control:
• Replace coiled cable
• Replace membrane keyboard of remote control
• Replace display board DX42 of remote control
(see section 6.20)
E3 42 31
occurs individually after the unit is Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled
switched ON. cable of release button A2 or on membrane keyboard of remote
control:
• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware version ≥ BA)
E6 13 43
occurs individually during Was the door • Acknowledge error
operation of unit. opened during the yes message with R key
exposure? • Close door contact
• Repeat the exposure
no

59 38 399 D3352
3 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher
H321
is triggered at start of exposure. Door contact yes • Close door contact
open? • Start exposure again
Is the error message displayed

again?
no yes

• Replace cable L117 (see section 6.21)
3.9
3.9.2 Error messages without installed remote
control
E3 13 40
occurs individually after unit is Was the release but- Switch the unit OFF
switched ON. and then ON again.
switch ON? Make sure that the
actuated during
switch-ON.

recur?
no yes
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:

• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware
version ≥ BA)
Short circuit in cable L108:
Replace cable L108, (see section 6.21)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 23
3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher
3.9.3 Error messages with and without installed

remote control

E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between z Replace cable L117 or L108 6-91
release button A2 and board DX11 z Replace board DX1 6-59
during switch-ON.
E6 13 41 Release signal missing on board z Replace cable L117 or L108 6-91
DX11 at start of exposure. z Replace board DX1 6-59
E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between z Replace cable L117 or L108 6-91
release button A2 and board DX11 z Replace board DX1 6-59
during unit operation.
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images
3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images

SIDEXIS XG must be installed and configured before you begin checking the
data paths.
i NOTE
For a panoramic test image, the panoramic mode must be activated on the
unit; for a ceph test image, the cephalometric mode must be activated; for a
TSA test image, the TS mode must be selected (see operating instructions).
Generate the test images for the different operating modes in succession.
1. Select constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:

Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST
The typical SIDEXIS user interface is started. Constancy test is already
preset.
3.10
2. Starting the exposure mode:
Click XCXP
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device opens.
i NOTE
If no X-ray device has been configured yet in SIDEXIS XG, the password input
dialog box will appear instead of the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device.
3. Select/confirm the X-ray device:

Select e.g. KAMMER4 and click OK
The dialog box for selecting the test type appears on the screen.
4. Select/confirm the test type:

Click SERVICE EXPOSURE
The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the screen.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 25
3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images Tab 3
5. Select/confirm the service exposure:

Click DIGITAL TEST PATTERN
– If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box for
selecting the X-ray component appears on the screen. In this case,
select/confirm the required component.
– If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dia-
log box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.
i NOTE
During operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to
the PC service mode logged by the PC.
Once the exposure is completed, the unit switches back to the user mode.
6. Take an exposure:
– Press the R key on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5/3/3 PPE)
to move the unit back to its starting position.
– Press the release button. Hold down the button until the exposure has
been completed.
i NOTE
A service message box indicates whether the generated test image is correct.
Acknowledge this message with OK. The test image is displayed on the
T R screen.
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 3 3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images
PAN test image CEPH test image
3.10
TSA test image
7. Check the images according to the following criteria:

– Tile structure of the existing segments
i NOTE
To facilitate checking, you may adjust the image contrast and brightness in
SIDEXIS.
– Linear grayscale gradient

– Intensity steps clearly recognizable
– No image artifacts detectable
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 27
3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images Tab 3
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
4 Adjustment
Tab 4
Contents
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment .........4 – 3
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu......................4 – 5
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit .........................4 – 9

4.3.1 Pan needle phantom ............................................ 4 – 9
4.3.2 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm
(XG 3 / 3 PPE only) ............................................ 4 – 10
4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor
(XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ................................. 4 – 12
4.3.4 Adjusting the (motorized) pan diaphragm
(XGPlus / XG 5) ................................................... 4 – 22
4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm
(XG 3 / 3 PPE).................................................... 4 – 32
4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter
(XGPlus / XG 5, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)................. 4 – 39
4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry
(XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ....................................... 4 – 45
4.3.8 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen
(XGPlus only)....................................................... 4 – 54

(XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) ........................4 – 56
4.4.1 Check the ring type
(for XGPlus with arm on left side only) ................ 4 – 56
4.4.2 Ceph test phantom ............................................. 4 – 57
4.4.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm............... 4 – 58
4.4.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation ........... 4 – 68
4.4.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction... 4 – 81
4.4.6 Adjusting the ceph quickshot
(XGPlus full version only) .................................... 4 – 90
4.4.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment
of the ear plugs................................................. 4 – 100

(XGPlus full version only) .....................................4 – 107

(XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ........................................4 – 115
59 38 399 D3352
4–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.1 Important information concerning adjustment
4 Adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment
WARNING
When performing the following tests, be sure to observe the radiation
protection regulations applicable in your country (see operating instruc-
tions).
CAUTION
Before starting the service routines for system adjustment, make sure that no
unit movements are active (especially diaphragm travels)! Otherwise the sys-
tem may become inoperable in rare cases.
i NOTE
“Radiation” is signaled with the message “X-RAY active!” (only for XGPlus),
a beep and an X-RAY LED.
i NOTE
Be sure to take screenshots of the PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT and
CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menus before and after the adjustment (see sec-
tion 4.6) and save them to the C:\SIDEXIS\XGRAW directory along with the
4.1
time and date!
Coarse and precision adjustment using the Diaphragm/system

adjustment menu in SIDEXIS XG
i NOTE
The Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Diaphragm and Ceph - Fixed point of ro-
tation submenus provide a coarse adjustment and a precision adjustment
(precision adjustment is preset).
Always try to use precision adjustment first when adjusting the unit. In most
cases, previous coarse adjustment is not necessary.
With SIDEXIS Version V02.20 and higher, a message window indicates when
a coarse adjustment is necessary.
Only if you cannot achieve your goal with precision adjustment, e.g. if the
exposed area is completely outside the image field, should you perform a
coarse and then a precision adjustment.
If a coarse adjustment proves necessary, deactivate the

PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box and follow the adjustment steps de-
scribed in the present chapter to perform a coarse adjustment.
The steps and correction procedure required for coarse adjustment are iden-
tical to those for precision adjustment. The only difference between the two
modes is the size of the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer
auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4–3
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment Tabs 4
Default values in the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu in

SIDEXIS XG
During the adjustment, the default adjustment values are displayed in the text
boxes of the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu.
First perform the adjustment with these default values. If you do not attain the
desired result via this automatic adjustment, you should determine the adjust-
ment values manually by measuring the exposure with the SIDEXIS measur-
ing ruler and then overwrite the default values in the menu.
This procedure is described in the following sections.
Return ring travel with unit SW version V02.27 and higher
Starting with unit version V02.27, return ring travel is automatically performed
during service operation (during adjustment). Actuation of the R key before or
after each adjustment exposure (as described in the following chapters) can
thus be omitted.
i NOTE
It is not possible to select a new exposure during the return ring travel
(incl. resetting of the actuators)!
If a selection is made during this period, the error message "It is not possible to
set the adjustment values at this time" or “No exposure can be taken" appears.
Acknowledge the error message and wait until the return ring travel has been
completed.
59 38 399 D3352
4–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu guides you through the

adjustment of the panoramic unit and the cephalometer. This service routine
is started from SIDEXIS XG:
4.2
EXTRAS Æ CONSTANCY TEST Æ XCXP Æ SELECT X-RAY DEVICE Æ SERVICE
EXPOSURE Æ DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
i NOTE
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu is password-protected. As
password, enter the first four digits of the current system date (PC) in reverse
order.
Example: On 05/30/2004, the service password is 5003
XGPlus i NOTE
When you open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu, the unit
switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph:

This mode is indicated by the PC service screen displayed on the Easypad.
In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad
are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. Gen-
eral control of the unit by means of the Easypad (as in the user mode) is not
possible in this mode.
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph bzw. XG 3 / 3 PPE:
SERVICE
This mode is indicated by the SERVICE reading on the Multipad.
In the PC service mode, the Multipad control options are determined by
SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. General control of the unit
by means of the Multipad (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4–5
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tabs 4
i NOTE
The tabs of the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and several check-
boxes corresponding to the system version are present and activated in the
software (i.e. visible) depending on the system configuration. The following
description of the menus is always based in the maximum configuration of the
comfort class (XGPlus).
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu has 12 submenus:

z Pan - Sensor adjustment (XGPlu s/ XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
z Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed Diagphragm (XGPlus / XG 5 or
XG 3 / 3 PPE)
z Pan - Filter (XGPlus / XG 5)
z Pan - Symmetry (XGPlus / XG 5/ 3 / 3 PPE)
z Ceph - Primary diaphragm (XGPlus / XG 5)
z Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (XGPlus / XG 5)
z Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (XGPlus / XG 5)
z Ceph quickshot (XGPlus full version only)
z TSA sensor (XGPlus full version only)
z Pan - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
z Ceph - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / XG 5)
z Sirona Service Sheet (for internal use only)
You can change between the individual submenus by clicking the menu tabs
with the mouse. To quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu, click
CANCEL.
The following submenus are required for pan adjustment

(XGPlus, XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE):
z Pan - Sensor adjustment: see page 4-12
z Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed diaphragm:
see page 4-22 (XGPlus / XG 5) or page 4-32 (XG 3 / 3 PPE)
z Pan - Filter (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE): see page 4-39
z Pan - Symmetry: see page 4-45
For the ceph adjustment (with XGPlus and XG 5)

you require the following submenu:
z Ceph - Primary diaphragm (see page 4-58)
z Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (see page 4-68)
z Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (see page 4-81)
z Ceph quickshot (XGPlus full version only, see page 4-90)
For the TSA adjustment (XGPlus full version only)

you need the submenu:
z TSA - Sensor (see page 4-107)
59 38 399 D3352
4–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
Direction of displacement of the exposed image area/

Information on the pictographs in the system adjustment menu
båÖäáëÜ
The Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Filter and Pan - Symmetry submenus
each contain a pictographic representation of the expected adjustment image
to help you perform the adjustment. The shifting directions indicated by the
plus and minus signs located below and next to the pictograph refer to shifting
of the exposed image area in the direction of the stationary auxiliary lines (see
the following example):
Sx
+ Sy
4.2
-
- +
In the example the exposed image area is offset to the left by the value Sx
and upward by the value Sy. In order to shift the image area so that it comes
to lie inside the auxiliary lines, you must enter …
z Sx (shift to the right) with a positive sign
z Sy (shift downward) with a negative sign
in the text boxes of the submenu.
i NOTE
For system version XG 3/3 PPE: The pan fixed diaphragm of the XG 3/3 PPE
system version cannot be adjusted via the software, i.e. the pan fixed
diaphragm must be adjusted by moving it mechanically (see section 4.3.5).
Generally speaking, the exposed image area must always be shifted

toward the auxiliary lines:
- Shift to the right or upward: Enter the value

(measured offset from the auxiliary line) with a
positive sign (XGPlus / XG 5) or mechanically
shift the diaphragm to to the right or upward (XG 3 / 3 PPE)
– Shift to the left or downward: Enter the value

(measured offset from the auxiliary line) with a
negative sign (XGPlus / XG 5) or mechanically
shift the diaphragm to the left or downward (XG 3 / 3 PPE)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4–7
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tabs 4
Displays during the adjustment procedure
During the adjustment procedure, different service routines are started from
SIDEXIS; they are displayed one after the other on the Easypad
touchscreen (XGPlus) or the Multipad display (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
...ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph
In addition to the relevant parameters, the Easypad touchscreen shows the
service routines which are currently executed as well as different help mes-
sages (see section 2.1).
...ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph or XG 3 / 3 PPE
In addition to the relevant parameters, the single-line display of the Multipad
shows different help messages (see section 2.1).
Help messages during the adjustment procedure
The most frequent help and status displays during adjustment are the follow-
ing:
Help messages H301: Move panoramic unit into starting position ‡ Press the R key R
H401: Plug the sensor into the PAN slot

H402: Plug the sensor into the CEPH slot
H406: Move cephalometer into starting position ‡ Press the R key R
Status displays z ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure

z Exposure not possible
z Wait until ORTHOPHOS is ready
z ORTHOPHOS is ready in XX s
z X-RAY active!
i NOTE
If any other help or error messages are displayed during adjustment, please
follow the instructions provided in chapter 2.
59 38 399 D3352
4–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit
4.3.1 Pan needle phantom
båÖäáëÜ
A
4.3
Accessory: Pan needle phantom
In order to perform the pan sensor adjustment and the symmetry adjust-
ment you must insert the needle phantom (A) in the bite block holder of the
panoramic X-ray unit.
The needle phantom must be removed from the bite block holder for the
PANdiaphragm and for the TSA adjustment.
CAUTION
It is essential that the needle phantom is removed from bite block holder of the
panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the
phantom may collide with the sensor.
Needles on
Top side
i NOTE
When fitting the needle phantom, make sure that it is correctly oriented. For
the adjustment of the X-ray unit, the phantom must be fitted in such a way that
the needles point upward.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4–9
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit Tabs 4

(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)
1.
2.
Version delivered until approx. end of 2006 Version delivered after approx. end of 2007
B B B B
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled in order to perform the sensor

adjustment of the ORTHOPHOS XG 3/3 PPE X-ray unit. To do this, proceed
as follows:
båÖäáëÜ
1. Remove the covers:
– Tube assembly, front
– Tube assembly, rear
2. Loosen the two screws (B) (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed
diaphragm upward.
z Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 11
4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor

(XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Sensor adjustment
Preparations z Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.
z Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
unit (see page 4-9).
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:
z The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled prior to the sensor adjustment

for the ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE system version (see page 4-10).
Opening PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 1. Open the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu (see section 4.2).
i NOTE
The menu provides a precision adjustment and a coarse adjustment
(precision adjustment is preset). Perform a precision adjustment first. In most
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Making the unit ready for exposure: 2. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:
Click IMAGE ACQUISITION
båÖäáëÜ
SIDEXIS screen The exposure dialog box showing the exposure status
appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen shows service routine S010.1
4.3
as well as the related exposure parameters.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 1
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
of service routine S010.1.
60/3____0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 13
Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60kV/3mA; 0.60 s):

– Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.
R
XGPlus:
The procedure is completed when the status message “ORTHOPHOS is
ready for exposure“ appears on the touchscreen and the exposure
WAIT! parameters of service routine S010.1 are displayed.
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The procedure is completed when the exposure parameters of service
routine S010.1 are displayed and the progress indicator disappears.
– Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
quisition is completed and the preview image appears in the exposure
dialog box.
Evaluating the X-ray image 4. Evaluate the X-ray image:
A B
Adjustment: ok Adjustment: not ok
– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed ar-
eas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan sensor must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Coarse or precision adjustment? Sensor adjustment can usually be performed directly via precision adjust-
ment. Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if one or several needles are completely
outside of the image field C in an image acquired with the PRECISION
båÖäáëÜ
ADJUSTMENT presetting, is it necessary to perform a coarse adjustment prior
to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUST-
MENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a coarse adjustment pro-
ceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment. The only difference
between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of the image area con-
sidered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment
mode.
C D
X-ray image with unadjusted pan sensor: 4.3

Alternatively with precision adjustment setting (C) and coarse adjustment setting (D)
On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment (D), the center pin is just barely
visible on the left margin of the image field in the middle. Even in this extreme
case, an adjustment would still be possible.
i NOTE
With SIDEXIS SW V01.45 and higher, a message window indicates whether a
coarse adjustment is required on completion of the precision exposure.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 15
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by
SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
For manual adjustment, the values displayed at this position in the text boxes
of the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-21).
First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the ad-
justment values is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-
justment (see page 4-20).
5. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:

The PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT dialog box appears in SIDEXIS.
The dialog box suggests a value Lx for the mechanical adjustment of the
sensor.
If the suggested value is greater than ±0.5mm, then perform a mechani-
cal adjustment of the sensor.
Moving the sensor 6. Adjust the sensor:
i NOTE
Positive sign = moves the sensor to the right
Negative sign = moves the sensor to the left
– Mark the position of the sensor.

– Loosen the three screws A (approx. 2 turns, do not unscrew fully)
A A – Move the sensor to the left or right by the displayed value Lx.
A
– Tighten screws A again.
- +

System version 1: Fixed sensor holder
A A
A
- +

Hardware version 2: motor-driven sensor holder

(XGPlus, TSA only)
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Making the unit ready for exposure 7. Confirm the sensor adjustment
and make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:
Click OK
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 1
60/3____0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 17

R
XGPlus:
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
Adjustment: ok
– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed ar-
eas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment
procedure starting with step 5.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
i NOTE
If you do not reach your goal via automatic adjustment, repeat the adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
procedure with manually determined adjustment values (see page 4-20).
Saving the values 10. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50. the values for S1 - S3 in the PAN -
SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjust-
ment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50,
the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct
adjustment.
z Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:
z Reattach the fixed diaphragm (see page 4-10).
4.3
z Go on to the next adjustment step.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 19
Manual adjustment of the PAN sensor
The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-
ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically
determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment
values in the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for z Measure distances S1, S2 and S3 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1, S2 and S3 manually
S1 S2 S3
i NOTE
To measure S1, S2 and S3, estimate the horizontal center position of the dis-
played needles. Measure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since
they may have been bent slightly after repeated use.
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can color the image in SIDEX-
IS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Overwriting default values for S1, S2 z Overwrite the default values for S1, S2 and S3 with the measured values
and S3 in the text boxes of the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
For information on the direction of displacement (input of +/- sign in the menu)
see page 4-7. Use points as decimal separators!
z Proceed with step 5 of the adjustment procedure.
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 21
4.3.4 Adjusting the (motorized) pan diaphragm

(XGPlus / XG 5)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Diaphragm
Preparations z Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic
X-ray unit (see page 4-9).
i NOTE
If a message window indicating that the diaphragm is tilted appears during the
pan diaphragm adjustment, this means that the primary diaphragm is me-
chanically maladjusted in the vertical axis. In this case, contact the Sirona
Customer Service Center:
Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Making the unit ready for exposure 2. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
XG 5: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 23
Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60 kV/3 mA; 0.20 s):
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B
4.3
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally centered in the

image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines (A).
– A white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible.
The maximum density must lie in the center of the diaphragm area
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 25
Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the diaphragm can be adjusted using precision adjustment
from the start (see step 5 onward). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if the
exposed image area is completely outside the image field C in an image
acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a
coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the
PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a
coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment.
The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of
the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the
coarse adjustment mode.
i NOTE
When the diaphragm is correctly adjust-
ed, a course adjustment does not produce
a meaningful image, since no surrounding
border can be seen in this case (similar to C D
image C).
X-ray image with unadjusted pan diaphragm:

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment D, the exposed area is just barely
visible at the right margin of the image field. Even in this extreme case, an
adjustment would still be possible.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for Sx and Sy were automatically determined by SIDEXIS
based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
båÖäáëÜ

appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 27
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
Adjustment: ok
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment procedure starting
with step 5.
i NOTE
i NOTE
If a message window indicating the need to take an additional X-ray exposure
opens at this point, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with item 5. This
is necessary even if the X-ray exposure which has been taken is already within
the tolerance limits. This additional exposure ensures that the new diaphragm
gap width offset is also correctly adjusted.
Click SAVE VALUES
4.3
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50. the values for Sx and Sy in the PAN
- DIAPHRAGM submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if
they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in
the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 29
Manual adjustment of the PAN diaphragm
values in the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
Determining adjustment values for Sx z Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
and Sy manually
Sy
S2
Sx
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Overwriting the default values for Sx z Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in
and Sy the text boxes of the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 31
4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm

(XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Diaphragm
i NOTE
Preparations The fixed diaphragm must be reattached for this adjustment step
(see page 4-10).
z Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic
X-ray unit (see page 4-9).
Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
XG 3/3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
4.3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
R
WAIT! – Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 33
A B

(A).
i NOTE
The adjustment of the pan fixed diaphragm (XG 3/3 PPE) must be performed
mechanically, i.e. this cannot be done via SIDEXIS!
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Measuring adjustment values in z Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
SIDEXIS
båÖäáëÜ
Sy
S2
4.3
Sx
i NOTE
Measured value x 0.27 (mm) = mechanical adjustment value of diaphragm
(mm)
i NOTE
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can also color the image in SI-
DEXIS (see SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 35
Mechanical adjustment of the fixed z Remove the covers (see also page 1-50):
diaphragm – Tube assembly, front
z Loosen both screws (A) slightly
(approx. 1 turn).
z Adjust the diaphragm position via eccentric screws B (horizontal adjust-
ment) and C (vertical adjustment).
– CW rotation of the eccentric screws:
movement of the diaphragm to the right or upward
– CCW rotation of the eccentric screws:
movement of the diaphragm to the left or downward
i NOTE
To measure the shift, refer to the gap between the plastic support and the lead
diaphragm (D).
z Tighten screws A again.
D D
Plastic Lead
support diaphragm
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
XG 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
4.3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
R
WAIT! – Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 37
Adjustment: ok

(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria have not yet been fulfilled, repeat the mechanical adjustment
of the diaphragm (see page 4-35) and then continue with step 5.
If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), then the adjustment of the
diaphragm is completed:
z Reattach the covers.

59 38 399 D3352
4 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter

(XGPlus / XG 5, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Filter
Opening PAN - FILTER 1. Go to the PAN - FILTER submenu.
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 39
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B
4.3
– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan filter must be adjusted.
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default value for Fx was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on
the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.
For manual adjustment, the value displayed at this position in the text box of
the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-44).
justment value is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 41
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A
4.3
Adjustment: ok
– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).
i NOTE
If this criterion is not yet fulfilled (B), repeat the adjustment procedure starting
with step 5.
procedure with a manually determined adjustment value (see page 4-44).
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the value:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the value for Fx in the
PAN - FILTER submenu is setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it
is within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text
box may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 43
Manual adjustment of the PAN filter
ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment value automatically
determined by SIDEXIS is overwritten by a manually determined adjustment
value in the PAN - FILTER submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for z Measure distance Fx with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
Fx manually
Fx
i NOTE
Overwriting the default value for Fx z Replace the default value for Fx by entering the measured value in the text
box of the PAN - FILTER submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry

(XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Symmetry
Preparations z Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
4.3
Opening PAN - SYMMETRY 1. Go to the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 45
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3

R
XGPlus:
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
Adjustment: ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)
4.3
C
S2
Adjustment: not ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 47
– The shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxil-
iary line must be coincident and located behind each other.
A tolerance (offset of needle from the central auxiliary line) of
± 0.75 mm is admissible (A).
– Distance A1 must be 88.6 ± 1 mm (A).
– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm (A).
– A white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible
(B).
i NOTE
If one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be adjusted.
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by
SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.

appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3
4.3
R
XGPlus:
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 49
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm

± 0.75 mm is admissible (A).
– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm (A).
(B).
i NOTE
Always measure exactly from pin center to pin center.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
If the X-ray image still does not correspond to the ideal image, it is pos-
sible that one or more criteria have not yet been fulfilled:
Case 1: Center needle not coincident with auxiliary line

If the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line do
not yet coincide, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.
Case 2: Symmetry not OK

If the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line co-
incide, but the symmetry or the distance between the two outer needles is not
yet correct, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.
i NOTE
Saving the values 8. If all criteria are fulfilled and the current image is identical to the ideal im-
age A + B, then save the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the values for S1, S2 and S3 in the
PAN - SYMMETRY submenu are set equal to zero with a correct adjustment,
i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the
4.3
values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct
adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 51
Manual adjustment of the PAN symmetry
values in the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
S1 S2 S3
i NOTE
Measure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since they may have been
bent slightly after repeated use.
Always measure exactly from pin center to pin center.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
and S3 in the text boxes of the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 53
4.3.8 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen

(XGPlus only)
Switch the unit ON 1. Switch the unit ON.

2. When the start screen appears (see above), press the light localizer, T
and R keys immediately and simultaneously.
i NOTE
These keys must be pressed while the unit is booting and the start screen is
displayed.
The first adjustment screen appears on the display.
Performing a calibration 3. Calibrate the touchscreen:
z Touch the upper left corner.

The second adjustment screen appears on the display.
z Touch the lower right corner.

The third adjustment screen appears on the display.
see next page
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
z Touch the center of the green square in the

upper right corner.
The fourth adjustment screen appears on the display.
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Try to place the black dots which then appear as close to the centers of the
squares as possible by touching the centers of the squares.
z Touch the center of the green square in the

lower left corner.
The fifth adjustment screen appears on the display.
z Confirm the adjustment with YES.
4.3
The touchscreen is now adjusted.
To repeat the adjustment, touch NO.

You can abort the adjustment at any time by pressing the ABORT button.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 55
4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) Tabs 4

(XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed)
4.4.1 Check the ring type

(for XGPlus with arm on left side only)
In XGPlus units with the ceph arm mounted on the left side, a diffferent ring
type is used with a serial number ≤ 40104 than with a serial number > 40104.
Due to the different ring types used, the default ring offsets stored in the sys-
tem for the position of the ring switching plate are also different.
If a software update is performed on a system with the old ring type, this pre-
sents no problem as long as no module replacement (DX11) is performed and
the system adjustment is not reset to the factory setting via the CEPH - RESET
ADJUSTMENT menu (see page 4-115).
If the previous system adjustment values are lost for any of the above rea-
sons, the correct ring type must be reset via service routine S034.7 before
beginning the adjustment of the cephalometer.
Therefore, check before beginning the adjustment...

z whether an old ring type is installed in the system
Old ring type = ceph units with serial nos. up to 40104
new ring type = ceph units with serial no. 40105 or higher
z whether a module has been replaced or the adjustment values have been
reset and...
z if the answer is yes, execute service routine S034.7 (see page 5-145).
i NOTE
XG 5 and XGPlus units with the ceph arm mounted on the right side are always
equipped with the new ring type. It is therefore not necessary to check the ring
type of these units.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed)
4.4.2 Ceph test phantom
båÖäáëÜ
B
Accessory: Ceph test phantom
4.4
For the adjustment of the ceph primary diaphragm and the ceph main X-
ray beam direction, you must insert test phantom B in the sensor slot on
the panoramic X-ray unit.
For the adjustment of the ceph fixed point of rotation, you must remove the
test phantom from the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 57
4.4.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Primary diaphragm
i NOTE
For units with a unit software < V02.27 the exposure parameters for the prima-
ry diaphragm adjustment may deviate from the parameters shown here
(64 kV/16 mA; 6.1 s).
CAUTION
It is essential that the PAN needle phantom is removed from bite block holder
of the panoramic X-ray unit before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the
Preparations z Move the ear plug holders on the cephalometer completely apart and
swing them out of the beam direction (ap).
z Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit
(see page 4-57).
z Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the cephalometer.
z Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu
(see page 4-5).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Call up CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.
båÖäáëÜ
4.4
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 59
1 - 64 kV/16 mA + S10
2 6.1 s 3
64/16____6.1____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A
S2
S2
Adjustment: ok
Length measurement with S3 = approx. 60 mm
SIDEXIS
4.4
B
Adjustment: not ok
Length measurement with
SIDEXIS
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 61
– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-

age area A. A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.
– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must
be visible A.
– Distance S3 must be approx. 60mm.
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph primary diaphragm must be
adjusted.
i NOTE
If S3 is > 70 mm, then contact the Sirona Customer Service Center: Phone: 0
62 51/16 - 16 16
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for S1, S2, S3 and S4 were automatically determined by SI-
DEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.

appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 64 kV/16 mA + S10
2 6.1 s 3
64/16____6.1____
1 2 3
4.4
R XGPlus:
WAIT!
parameters of service routine S010.3 are displayed.
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 63
S2
S2
Adjustment: ok
S3 = approx. 60 mm
– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-

age area A. A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.
– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must
be visible A.
– Distance S3 must be approx. 60mm.
i NOTE
with step 5.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Click SAVE VALUES
båÖäáëÜ
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 65
Manual adjustment of the ceph primary

diaphragm
values in the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for z Measure distances S1 - S4 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler:
S1, S2, S3 and S4 manually S1: Distance from the top edge of the image
S2: Distance from the right edge of the exposed area
to the middle of the center pin
S3: Width of the exposed area
S4: Distance from the bottom edge of the image
S1
S2
new S3
S4
i NOTE
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can invert or color
the image in SIDEXIS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Overwriting default values for S1, S2, z Overwrite the default values for S1, S2, S3 and S4 with the measured val-
S3 and S4 ues in the text boxes of the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 67
4.4.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Fixed point of rotation
CAUTION
Preparations z Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-
ray unit (see page 4-57).
Opening CEPH - FIXED POINT OF 1. Go to the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
ROTATION
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
4.4
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 69
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B
4.4
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie centered and straight

in the image field as well as inside the superimposed
auxiliary lines (A).
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-
justed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 71
Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the fixed point of rotation can be adjusted using precision
adjustment from the start (see steps 5 ff.). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if
the exposed image area is completely outside the image field C in an image
acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a
coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the
PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a
coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment.
The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of
the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the
coarse adjustment mode.
C D
X-ray image with unadjusted ceph fixed point of rotation:

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment D, the exposed area is still visible
in the image field. Even in this extreme case, an adjustment would still be pos-
sible.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by SI-
DEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
båÖäáëÜ

SIDEXIS screen The CEPH ADJUSTMENT - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION

dialog box appears in SIDEXIS.
The dialog box suggests two values, Lx and Ly, for the mechanical adjust-
ment of the ceph secondary diaphragm.
If the suggested values are greater than ±0.5 mm, you must perform a
mechanical adjustment of the diaphragm.
i NOTE
Positive sign = Moves the diaphragm to the right or upward
Negative sign = Moves the diaphragm to the left or downward
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 73
Adjusting the diaphragm 6. Adjust the diaphragm on the cephalometer mechanically.

To do this, proceed as follows:
Removing the cover 7. Loosen screw B and remove the cover of the secondary diaphragm by
pulling it downward.
Detaching the diaphragm 8. Loosen screws C slightly (approx. 2-3 turns).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Adjusting the inclination 9. Adjust the inclination of the diaphragm with screw D (Lx mm) and the
height of the diaphragm with screw E (Ly mm).
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
Screw D: CCW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the right

D CW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the left
Lx Screw E: CCW rotation = downward correction of diaphragm
CW rotation = upward correction of diaphragm
E Use a ruler to measure the displacement.
The directions of rotation specified for the screws above apply equally to both
Ly versions (with the ceph arm on the left and on the right).
z Tighten screws C again.
Confirming the diaphragm adjustment 10. Confirm the mechanical correction of the ceph secondary diaphragm:
Click OK
4.4
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 75
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A
4.4
Adjustment: ok

(A).
i NOTE
If this criterion is not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with
step 5.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 77
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the values for S1, S2 and S3 in the
CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu are setequal to zero with a cor-
rect adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions
< V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with
a correct adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation

manually
båÖäáëÜ
values in the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
S1
4.4
B
S3
S2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 79
and S3 in the text boxes of the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
4.4.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction
CAUTION
4.4
Preparations z Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit
(see page 4-57).
z Swing the ear plug holders out of the beam direction.
Opening CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM 1. Go to the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.
DIRECTION
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 81
appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen displays service routine S010.6
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 14.9 s 6
80/14___14.9____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
R
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 83
A
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
Adjustment: ok
Adjustment: not ok
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If

this bar is visible, the exposure is OK and ...
båÖäáëÜ
– the two beams imaged are within the tolerance band of
± 10 mm (A).
i NOTE
If the above criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph main X-ray
beam direction must be adjusted.
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on

4.4
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 85
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen displays service routine S010.6
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 14.9 s 6
80/14___14.9____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A
Adjustment: ok
– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If
4.4
this bar is visible, the exposure is OK and ...
– the two beams imaged are within the tolerance band of
± 10 mm (A).
i NOTE
step 5.
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the value:
Click SAVE VALUES
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 87
Manual adjustment of the ceph main X-ray beam

direction
value in the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for z Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1 manually
S1
Measuring range
Measuring range
i NOTE
Measure within the measuring range shown in C.
Inflection point Measure maximum distance S1. If the X-ray beam is imaged in the form of an
S curve, measure S1 at the inflection point of the curve, but always within the
measuring range shown.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Overwriting the default value for S1 z Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH
MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu with the measured value if nec-
essary.
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Use points as decimal separators!
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 89
4.4.6 Adjusting the ceph quickshot

(XGPlus full version only)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ ceph quickshot
CAUTION
Preparations z Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-
ray unit (see page 4-57).
Opening CEPH - QUICKSHOT 1. Go to the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S010.8 and its specific exposure parameters are
4.4
displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8
80/14___0.30____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 91
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B
4.4
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie centered and straight in

the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines
(A).
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot
must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 93
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on

appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S010.8 and its specific exposure parameters
are displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8
80/14___0.30____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
R
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 95
Adjustment: ok
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie centered and straight in

the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines
(A).
(A).
i NOTE
step 5.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the
value:
Click SAVE VALUES
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the value for S1 in the CEPH - QUICK-
SHOT submenu is setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it is within
the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text box may
deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
z Quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and proceed to the

section 4.4.7 "Checking and adjusting the alignment of the ear plugs" or
continue the adjustment procedure with the TSA sensor menu (see page
4-107).
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 97
Manual adjustment of the ceph quickshot
value in the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for z Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1 manually
S1
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Overwriting the default value for S1 z Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH
QUICKSHOTsubmenu with the measured value if necessary.
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 99
4.4.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment of the

ear plugs
Checking the ear plug alignment
i NOTE
The sensor must be plugged into the sensor slot on the cephalometer.
The sensor must not be plugged into the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray
unit.
Preparations XGPlus:
z Select the CEPH mode in the main menu on the Easypad.
XG 5:
z Select one of the ceph programs on the Multipad.
Position of the ear plug holders 1. Move the ear plug holders completely apart and swing them
into the beam path.
Fitting the adjusting caps 2. Fit adjusting caps D onto the ear plugs and secure them with adhesive
tape.
z Fit the black adjusting cap on the outside (sensor side)
z Fit the transparent adjusting cap on the inside (tube assembly side).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 100 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Removing the cover 3. Unscrew and remove the cover from the cephalometer.
båÖäáëÜ
Opening the SIDEXIS Service menu 4. Open the SIDEXIS Service menu: To do this, proceed as follows:
Opening the constancy test z Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:
Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST
The typical SIDEXIS user interface is started.
Constancy test is already preset.
4.4
Starting the exposure mode z Start the exposure mode:
Click XCXP
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen.
Selecting/confirming the X-ray device z Select/confirm the desired X-ray device:

Select e.g. KAMMER4 and click OK
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 101
Selecting/confirming the test type z Select/confirm the test type:

Click SERVICE EXPOSURE
The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on
the screen.
Selecting/confirming the service exposure z Select/confirm the service exposure:

Click QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE
i NOTE
The ceph mode must be activated for the ceph quality test exposure
(see page 4-100).
i NOTE
If necessary, select the X-ray component.
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 102 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Starting the exposure 5. Take an exposure:

R
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus:
ready for exposure“ appears on the touchscreen.
WAIT!
XG5:
The procedure is completed when the progess indicator disappears.
dialog box.
Image The lead balls in the adjusting caps appear as dots on the image.
The two dots must be coincident.
i NOTE
If the two dots are not coincident, the ear plugs must be adjusted.
4.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 103
Adjusting the ear plug alignment
Horizontal correction 6. Loosen screws A slightly. Do not unscrew them completely!

7. Adjust the ear plugs in the horizontal direction by turning screw B coun-
terclockwise or clockwise. The direction of rotation corresponding to a unit
with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on the right side is shown in the
following illustration:
Ceph arm mounted on Ceph arm mounted on

left-hand side right-hand side
z Tighten screws A again.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 104 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
C
4.4
C
approx. 100 degrees
Vertical correction 8. Turn the rotary table counterclockwise approx. 100 degrees until you can
see screw C through the opening in the cover plate.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 105
9. Loosen screw C slightly (do not unscrew it completely!) and adjust the
ear plugs in the vertical direction with knurled nut D. The direction of ro-
tation corresponding to a unit with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on
the right side is shown in the following illustration:

z Tighten screw C again.
Position of the ear plug holders 10. Turn the ear plug holders back into the beam direction. Make sure that the
black adjusting cap is located on the outside again.
z Release radiation again to check the adjustment

(see page 4-101).
– If the two dots displayed on the screen are coincident, reattach the cov-
er (see page 4-101).
– If the two dots displayed on the screen are not yet coincident, repeat
the adjustment procedure.
outside
z The adjustment of the unit is now completed.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 106 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.5 TSA sensor adjustment (XGPlus full version only)

båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ TSA sensor
4.5
z Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu if it is not already
open (see page 4-5).
Opening TSA - SENSOR 1. Go to the TSA - SENSOR submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 107
4.5 TSA sensor adjustment (XGPlus full version only) Tabs 4
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4
R
WAIT!
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 108 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B
4.5

image field (A).
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 109
i NOTE
Making the unit ready for exposure The default values for S1 and S2 were automatically determined by SIDEXIS
based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.

appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4
R
WAIT!
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 110 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A
4.5
Adjustment: ok
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally and vertically

centered in the image field (A).
(A).
i NOTE
with step 5.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 111
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50, the values for Sx and Sy in the TSA
- SENSOR submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if they
are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the
text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
z The adjustment of the TSA sensor is completed.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 112 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Manual adjustment of the TSA sensor
båÖäáëÜ
values in the TSA - SENSOR submenu.
Determining adjustment values for Sx z Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
and Sy manually
i NOTE
Measure from the edge of the imaged diaphragm area roughly up to the edge
of the image area. Leave a small border, since a surrounding white border
should be present following the correction.
4.5
S2
Sy
Sx
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 113
Overwriting the default values for Sx z Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in
and Sy the text boxes of the TSA - SENSOR submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 114 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 4 4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

(XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Important: Make sure to note down the values displayed in the text boxes
before modifying them. This will enable you to reset the adjustment val-
ues to the factory settings if necessary.
Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for more information (or to
enable the menu):
Phone: 0 62 51/16 - 16 16
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu offers you the possibility of

resetting or manually modifying any or all of the pan or ceph adjustment
settings you have made in very exceptional cases.
Resetting the pan adjustment z To reset the pan settings, open the
PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.
4.6
Ceph - Reset adjustment z To reset the ceph settings, open the
(not for XG 3/3 PPE) CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.
i NOTE
If the adjustment values have been reset, the unit must be readjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 115
4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 4
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 116 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
5 Service routines
Tab 5
Contents
5.1 Selecting the Service menu ..................................5 – 10

5.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (XGPlus) .................. 5 – 10
5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ... 5 – 13
5.2 Selecting a service routine ....................................5 – 15

5.2.1 Service routines with security access............... 5 – 17
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS ..............................5 – 18
5.4 Service routine S001.............................................5 – 21

5.5.1 S002: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 24
5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 26
5.5.3 S002: Test step 4 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 27

5.6.1 S005: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 29
5.6.2 S005: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 31
5.6.3 S005: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 33
5.6.4 S005: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 34
5.6.5 S005: Test step 7 ............................................. 5 – 37

5.7.1 S007: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 41
5.7.2 S007: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 44
5.7.3 S007: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 46

5.8.1 S008: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 48
5.8.2 S008: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 50
5.8.3 S008: Test step 4 (XG5 / XGPlus only) ............. 5 – 54

5.9.1 S009: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 56

5.10.1 S012: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 60
5.10.2 S012: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 63
5.10.3 S012: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 65
59 38 399 D3352
5–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5
5.11 Service routine S014 .............................................5 – 67

5.11.1 S014: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 67
5.11.2 S014: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 69
5.11.3 S014: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 71
5.11.4 S014: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 73

5.12.1 S015: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 74

5.13.1 S017: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 78
5.13.2 S017: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 82
5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (XGPlus only) ....................... 5 – 84
5.13.4 S017: Test step 5 (XGPlus only) ....................... 5 – 86
5.13.5 S017: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 87
5.13.6 S017: Test step 8 ............................................. 5 – 89
5.13.7 S017: Test step 9 ............................................. 5 – 91
5.13.8 S017: Test step 10 (XGPlus only) ..................... 5 – 93
5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 / 3 only) ................... 5 – 95
5.13.11 S017: Test step 13 (XGPlus full version only) ... 5 – 97
5.13.12 S017: Test step 14 (XGPlus full version only) ... 5 – 98
5.13.13 S017: Test step 15 ........................................ 5 – 101
5.13.14 S017: Test step 17
Setting the standard
acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG ........... 5 – 103
5.13.15 S017: Test step 17
Checking or accepting the
diaphragm configuration, worldwide
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) .................................... 5 – 105
5.13.16 S017: Test step 22 (XG 3 PPE only).............. 5 – 107
5.13.17 S017: Test step 23 (XG 3 PPE only).............. 5 – 108
5.14 Service routine S018 ...........................................5 – 109

5.14.1 S018: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 110
5.14.2 S018: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 112
5.14.3 S018: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 113
5.14.4 S018: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 115
5.14.5 S018: Test step 6 ........................................... 5 – 117
5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) .....................5 – 118

5.15.1 S020: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 119
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5–3
Tab 5
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....... 5 – 121

5.16.1 S021: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 121
5.16.2 S021: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 123
5.17 Service routine S032........................................... 5 – 126

5.17.1 S032: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 126
5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....... 5 – 130

5.18.1 S033: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 130

5.19.1 S034: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 135
5.19.2 S034: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 139
5.19.3 S034: Test step 6 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ....... 5 – 143
5.19.5 S034: Test step 8
(XGPlus and full version only) ......................... 5 – 146
5.19.6 S034: Test step 9
(XGPlus and full version only) ......................... 5 – 148

5.20.1 S037: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 152
5.20.2 S037: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 154
5.20.3 S037: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 157
5.20.4 S037: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 159
59 38 399 D3352
5–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5
Directory of all available service routines
XGPlus Function
båÖäáëÜ
Service routine XG 3 XG 3 PPE XG 5 Page
S001 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, fixed 5-21
radiation time
S002 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, 5-23
maximum radiation time can be selected
S002: Test step 1 X X X X Primary diaphragm remains in last position 5-24
selected
S002: Test step 3 (not – – X X Primary diaphragm opened fully 5-26
for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
S002: Test step 4 (not – – X X Filter element for 0.8 mm Cu step filter; the 5-27
for XG 3 / 3 PPE) primary diaphragm is set to a widened
opening symmetrical to the PAN setting so
that the step filter still remains covered
S005 X X X X General X-ray tube assembly service 5-28
S005: Test step 2 X X X X Automatic adjustment of preheating 5-29
S005: Test step 4 X X X X Fan test 5-31
S005: Test step 5 X X X X Temperature sensor test 5-33
S005: Test step 6 X X X X Switch off cool-down interval of the single 5-34
tank
S005: Test step 7 X X X X Setting continuous operation of the tube 5-37
assembly fan
S007 X X X X Error logging memory 5-40
S007: Test step 1 X X X X Display error logging memory 5-41
S007: Test step 2 X X X X Clear error logging memory 5-44
S007: Test step 5 X X X X Enabling the CAN bus logging in the 5-46
Miniweb
S008 X X X X Update service 5-48
S008: Test step 2 X X X X Overview of the module software versions 5-48
S008: Test step 3 X X X X Input/confirmation of unit serial number 5-50
S008: Testschritt 4 – – X X Initialize the function activation 5-54
S009 X X X X Flash file system 5-56
S009: Test step 4 X X X X Format flash file system 5-56
S012 X X X X CAN bus service 5-59
S012: Test step 2 X X X X Inquiry of the CAN status register of the 5-60
modules
S012: Test step 3 X X X X Resetting the CAN status register of the 5-63
modules
S012: Test step 4 X X X X Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of 5-65
modules
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5–5
Tabs 5
Service routine XG 3 XG 3 PPE XG 5 XGPlus Function Page

S014 X X X X Rotation motor service 5-67
S014: Test step 1 X X X X Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home 5-67
position
S014: Test step 2 – – – X Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph home 5-69
position
S014: Test step 3 X X X X Free travel of rotational drive 5-71
S014: Test step 4 X X X X Display of light barrier signals of rotational 5-73
drive
S015 X X X X Actuator service 5-74
S015: Test step 5 X X X X Functional test of actuators 1 + 2 5-74
S017 X X X X Configuration service 5-77
S017: Test step 2 X X X X Configure hardware version (Ceph, Pan, 5-78
TSA)
S017: Test step 3 X X X X Entering the country group code 5-82
S017: Test step 4 – – – X Selecting the language index within a 5-84
language set
S017: Test step 5 – – – X Selecting the language set index within a 5-86
language set
S017: Test step 6 X X X X Activating the remote control display 5-87
S017: Test step 8 X X X X Selecting the kVmA level series 5-89
S017: Test step 9 X X X X Configuring operation without or with DX41 5-91
S017: Test step 10 X X X X Configuration of headrest 5-93
(XGPlus only)
S017: Test step 11 – – X – Selecting the image format 5-95
(XG 5 / 3 only)
S017: Test step 12 – – – X Enabling/disabling the preview image 5-96
(XGPlus only)
S017: Test step 13 – – – X Enabling/disabling the welcome screen 5-97
(XGPlus full version
only)
S017: Test step 14 – – – X Enabling/disabling certain lines of the 5-98
(XGPlus full version welcome screen
only)
S017: Test step 15 X X X X Enabling/disabling the acoustic signal for 5-101
the end of exposure
S017: Test step 17 – – X X Setting acceptance/constancy test standard, 5-103
RöV FRG
Checking and accepting the diaphragm 5-105
configuration, worldwide
S017: Test step 18 – – – – In preparation.
Caution! This routine must not be activated,
since it will cause malfunctioning of the unit
59 38 399 D3352
5–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5

S017: Test step 22 X X – – Configuration of PPE display 5-107
(XG 3 PPE only)
båÖäáëÜ
S017: Test step 23 X X – – Configuration of PPE display warning level 5-108
(XG 3 PPE only)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5–7
Tabs 5

S018 X X X X Service for height adjustment 5-109
S018: Test step 2 X X X X Setting the maximum travel height 5-110
S018: Test step 3 X X X X Undoing the maximum travel height setting 5-112
S018: Test step 4 X X X X Check of the height adjustment sensor 5-113
system
S018: Test step 5 X X X X Set minimum travel height 5-115
S018: Test step 6 X X X X Undoing the minimum travel height setting 5-117
S020 X X X X Service for temple support 5-118
S020: Test step 1 – – – X Pramming the switching thresholds of the 5-119
temple support
S021 – – X X Service for motor-driven diaphragm 5-121
S021: Test step 1 – – X X Initialization of diaphragm axis 5-121
S021: Test step 3 – – X X Function test (movement) of the TSA sensor 5-123
holder
S032 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-126
S032: Test step 10 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-126
S033 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-130
S033: Test step 10 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-130
S034 – – X X Service for the digital cephalometer 5-134
S034: Test step 4 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of ceph 5-135
scan sensor axis
S034: Test step 5 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of ceph 5-139
scan secondary diaphragm axis
S034: Test step 6 (not – – X X Moving to the ceph packing position 5-143
for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
S034: Test step 7 – – – X Display/change ring type 5-145
(XGPlus only)
S034: Test step 8 – – – X User-specific determination of the 5-146
(XGPlus and full version shadowing limit for C1 and C2
only)
S034: Test step 9 – – – X User-specific determination of the 5-148
(XGPlus and full version shadowing limit for C3 and C3 30x23
only)
S037 X X X X Network service 5-151
S037: Test step 1 X X X X Displaying the network data 5-152
S037: Test step 2 X X X X Setting the default IP address, default 5-154
gateway address and default subnet mask
S037: Test step 3 X X X X Toggling the DHCP and UDP boot mode 5-157
(DEFAULT/STATIC)
S037: Test step 4 X X X X Manual input of IP address, default gateway 5-159
address and subnet mask
59 38 399 D3352
5–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5
5 Service routines
båÖäáëÜ
Using the service routines, you can check certain components and modules
of the unit for proper functioning.
This chapter describes all of the service routines which can be selected and
started via the service menu on the Easypad (XGPlus) and on the Multipad
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
i NOTE
Service routines S010 and S030 are not manually selectable and therefore
are not described here. They are used only for system adjustment
(see chapter 4).
i NOTE
Important for ceph units In addition to unit configuration via the service routines, starting with SIDEXIS
Version V01.51 for ceph units another option is also available for ceph images
(via a kind of mirror flag in the XAB.ini file). I.e. the Y axis can be displayed lat-
erally reversed (e.g. for C3 the nose tip of the exposure then points to the left
instead of to the right as in the normal configuration).
This configuration is effective for all ceph images created (C1-C4) and
is possible with the ceph arm mounted either on the left or on the right side of
the unit.
To activate the lateral image reversal, please contact the SIRONA Customer
Service Center. They will be glad to give you all the information you need on
this subject.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5–9
5.1 Selecting the Service menu Tabs 5
5.1 Selecting the Service menu
5.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (XGPlus)
Design of the user interface The touchscreen user interface of the Easypad is subdivided
into 4 levels:
Level 1: Main menu

Level 2: Program Settings
Level 3: Basic Settings
Level 4: Service menu
Main menu 1. To select level 2 (Program Settings menu), touch the blue arrow in the up-
per right corner of the touchscreen.
( n
Level 1
Program Settings menu 2. To select level 3 (Basic Settings menu), touch the left blue arrow in the up-
per right corner of the touchscreen.
( o
Level 2
Opens the info screen
Basic Settings menu 3. To select level 4 (Service menu/access), touch the wrench symbol.
( p
Level 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu
Service menu/access 4. Access the Service menu:

– Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light
( r up (approx. 2 s).
båÖäáëÜ
– Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s:
b – d – a.
Level 4
– After you have entered the key combination correctly, the Service
a b c d menu appears. You can return to the next higher level with the double
arrow key at any time.
approx. 2 s ( q
Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the
double-arrow key .
( s
Service menu
Level 4/
5.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 11
Displays and symbols in the From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines and per-
Service menu form important system settings, tests and compensations.
Depending on the procedure step, different control symbols and display
E X RAY Active! fields are activated in a context-sensitive way in the Service menu on the
touchscreen:
1 - XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX + S2
2 - X + 1
3 - XXX +
T R
Display Title bar: X RAY Radiation can be released

X RAY Active! Caution, radiation active!
Selection fields 1 - 3: 1 - + Display fields for service routines,

test steps, values, IDs,
2 - + etc.
3 - +
Buttons Patient symbol keys Different functions,

a - d: a b c d depending on the service routine
Memory key: For saving an input
Service key: Different functions

dep. on service routine, however
usually for confirming a selection
or jumping to the next
test step
Test key: T For starting a test
Return key: R For moving the unit to the

starting position or confirming
a save operation
Double arrow key: Return to the Main menu
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu
5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
1. Press the Service key until the LED above the Service key lights up.
After the Service key is released, the LEDs above the patient symbol keys
light up.
approx. 2 s
(
2. Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s:
b – d – a.
n
After you have entered the key combination correctly, the Service menu
appears.
i NOTE
The service mode is signaled by a slow flashing of the Power LED å.
a b c d
(
Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the
up arrow key above selection field 3 (see section 5.1.2).
(
S001____________
5.1
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 13
Displays and keys on the Multipad From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines
(for service only) and perform important system settings, tests and compensations.
Depending on the procedure step, different hints, error messages and param-
eters are displayed in a context-sensitive way on the Multipad:
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Display Selection fields 1 - 3: Display fields for service routines,

test steps, values, IDs, etc.
1 2 3
8 digits 4 digits 4 digits
i NOTE
The empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are marked
with underscores in this Manual (see page 1-6). They have been added to en-
hance clarity and are not present on the real Multipad.
Prog. S kV mA
Keys Patient symbol keys different functions,

a - d: a b c d depending on the service routine
Memory key: For saving an input
Service key: different functions

dep. on service routine, however
usually for confirming a selection
or jumping to the next
test step
Test key: T For starting a test
Return key: R For moving the unit to the

starting position or confirming
a save operation
Double arrow key: Return to the Main menu
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine
5.2 Selecting a service routine
båÖäáëÜ
z Select the Service menu (see section 5.1).
Selecting a service routine 1. Select the desired system version using the arrow keys of selection
field 1 and confirm this selection with the Service key.
i NOTE
If the selected service routine comprises several test steps, the first selectable
test step is displayed in selection field 2.
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
( n
(
1 - S005 + n
S005_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
( o
( o
Selecting a test step 2. Select the desired test step using the arrow keys of selection field 2 and
confirm your selection by pressing the Service key.
( n
5.2
1 - S005 +
(
S005_______4____
(
2 - 4 + n n
3
1 2 3
( o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 15
5.2 Selecting a service routine Tabs 5
XGPlus: The selected service routine as well as the selected test step are
displayed in the right column (in our example S005, test step 4).
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: The parameters or IDs of the selected service routine are displayed on the
Multipad. The Multipad does not show which service routine or test step is
currently active.
1 - 01 + S5
________01______
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
R
Quitting the service routine XGPlus:
To return to the service routine selection menu, press the Service key
or the double arrow key .
To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
Pressing the up arrow key above selection field 3 returns you to the ser-
vice routine selection menu.
To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the
up arrow key above selection field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine
5.2.1 Service routines with security access
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
A security code is required for accessing service routines involving functions
such as radiation release or editing of configuration data or stored values.
This procedure prevents the inadvertent selection or activation of these
service routines.
To select a service routine or test step with security access, proceed as fol-
lows:
WARNING
Be sure to observe the radiation protection regulations applicable in
your country.
Selecting the service routine/test step 1. Select the service routine or the test step and confirm your selection with
the Service key.
( n
(
1 - S002 + n
S002_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
( o
( o
After you have confirmed your selection, a 0 appears in selection

field 2.
5.2
Confirming the security access 2. Confirm the security access by once again selecting the number of the
main routine (in our example 2) with the arrow keys of selection field 2
and then pressing the Service key.
1
( n
3
- 2 +
( n
___________2____
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
Following this double selection and confirmation, the service routine is ac-
tivated.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 17
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tabs 5
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS
WARNING
your country.
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus The X-Ray radiation indicator ç lights up briefly.

After approx. 2 s, the green LED å in the upper right corner of the Easypad
lights up. This LED remains permanently lit as long as the unit is ON.
The start screen appears on the touchscreen of the Easypad and the sys-
tem’s self-adjustment routine starts running (for approx. 1 min.). At the
o n same time, the rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counter-
clockwise and the diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple sup-
ports on the panoramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully
opened position.
Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, the main menu appears
on the touchscreen and help message H301 prompts you to move the unit
to the starting position.
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE All LEDs and the LED display on the Multipad light up briefly.
The green LED in the upper right corner of the Multipad å remains perma-
nently lit as long as the unit is ON.
The initialization status is visualized by a progress indicator while the unit
performs a self-adjustment routine (approx. 1 min.). At the same time, the
n rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counterclockwise and the
diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple supports on the pan-
oramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully opened position.
Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, help message H301
prompts you to move the unit to the starting position.
2. Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.
G
z Switch the PC ON and start SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 5 5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS
3. Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:

Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST.
The typical Sidexis user interface is started.
båÖäáëÜ
Constancy test is already preset.
4. Start the exposure mode:

Click XCXP.
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen.
5. Select/confirm the X-ray device:

Select the desired X-RAY DEVICE and click OK.
i NOTE
Under certain circumstances, the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device may
be skipped by the software and the dialog box for selecting the test type ap-
pears immediately.
6. Select/confirm the test type:

Click SERVICE EXPOSURE.
The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the screen.
5.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 19
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tabs 5
7. Select/confirm the SERVICE EXPOSURE.

The following service exposures are available for selection:
DIGITAL TEST PATTERN: Checks the data transmission
path between PC and sensor
FACTORY SERVICE: Sets interlock signal for
service programs (only for D3297)
DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE: Check of pan and
ceph adjustments
DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT: Adjustment
QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE: Test exposure not stored in
PDATA
If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box for select-
ing the X-ray device appears on the screen. In this case, select/confirm
the required component.
If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dialog
box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.
i NOTE
During operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to
the PC service mode logged by the PC (see section 4.2).
When you select the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu...
the dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.
z Enter the service password and confirm your input by clicking OK.
i NOTE
As servicepassword, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in re-
verse order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service
password).
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
Tab 5 5.4 Service routine S001
5.4 Service routine S001
Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
båÖäáëÜ
WARNING
your country.
Function S001: Test of X-ray beam and kV/mA levels
Radiation with selected kV/mA level Security access

Radiation time cannot be selected, max. 14.0 sec.
Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected
z Select the Service menu (see page 5-10).
Selecting service routine S001 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select
service routine S001 and confirm this selection with the
Service key .
( n
(
1 - S001 + n
S001____________
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
( o
( o
5.4
main routine (1) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing
the Service key .
1
( n
___________1____
2
3
- 1 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 21
S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
5.4 Service routine S001 Tabs 5
Selecting the kV/mA level 3. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired kV/mA level.
i NOTE
The maximum radiation time is displayed in selection field 2. The maximum
radiation time cannot be changed in this service routine and equals
14.0 seconds.
Radiation is emitted as long as the release button remains pressed until the
maximum time of 14.0 seconds is reached.
E X RAY ( n
1 - 60 kV/8 mA +
( n
60/8____14.0____
(
2 14 s
n
3
1 2 3
Releasing radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.
9 Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement

9 The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set
9 The radiation time is 14.0 seconds
i NOTE
If you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has
elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted.
The actual radiation time is not displayed.
When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of

the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad
(automatic exposure blocking).
Pressing the Service key or the double arrow key returns you to the
service routine selection menu.
To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the double
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
To return to the service routine selection menu, press the up arrow key
above selection field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S002: Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected
Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time
båÖäáëÜ
can be selected
WARNING
your country.
Function S002 X-ray beam test
Radiation with selected kV/mA level

Maximum radiation time selectable
Radiation from any position
Test step 1 Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected Security access
Test step 3 Primary diaphragm opened fully Security access
Test step 4 Filter element for 0.8 Cu step filter Security access
The primary diaphragm is set to a widened opening symmetrical to the
PAN setting so that the step filter still remains covered.
Selecting service routine S002 1. Select service routine S002 using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
( n
(
1 +
5.5
- S002 n
S002_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 23
S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last pos.
5.5.1 S002: Test step 1
Selecting test step 1 1. Select test step 1 in selection field 2 with the arrow keys and confirm your
selection by pressing the Service key .
1 - S002 +
( n
3
- 1 +
( n
S002_______1____
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
the Service key .
1
( n
___________2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
Selecting the kV/mA level and radiation 3. Use the arrow keys of
time – selection field 1 to select the desired kV/mA level and
– selection field 2 to select the desired radiation time.
( n
( o
1 - 60 kV/8 mA +
( n
(
60/8____2.00____
(
2 - 2s + o n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last pos.
Releasing radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.
9 Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement
båÖäáëÜ
9 The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set
9 The maximum radiation time corresponds to the selected radiation
time
i NOTE
If you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has
elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted.
The actual radiation time is not displayed.
When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of

the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad (au-
tomatic exposure blocking).
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 25
S002.3: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. opened fully
5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Difference from S002, test step 1:

9 Primary diaphragm is opened fully
i NOTE
For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.
After you have selected test step 3, the primary diaphragm is moved to
the new position (opened fully).
During this time, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.
1 S2
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S002.4: Radiation without rotary movement, max. radiation time selectable, with 0.8 mm Cu
båÖäáëÜ
Difference from S002, test step 1:
9 A filter element for a 0.8 Cu step filter is inserted in the beam path
9 The primary diaphragm is widened symmetrically to the pan
position so that the step filter still remains covered
i NOTE
For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.
After you have selected test step 4, the primary diaphragm is moved to
the new position (opened fully and symmetrical to PAN position).
During this time, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.
1 S2
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
5.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 27
S005: General X-ray tube assembly service
General X-ray tube assembly service
WARNING
your country.
Function S005 General X-ray tube assembly service
Test step 2 Automatic compensation of preheating Security access
Test step 4 Fan test
Test step 5 Temperature sensor test
Test step 6 Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank Security access
Test step 7 Configuring continuous operation of the tube assembly fan Security access
Selecting service routine S005 1. Use the arrow keys to select service routine S005.
(n
(
1 - S005 + n
S005_______2____
(
2 - 2 +
n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S005.2: Automatic adjustment of preheating
5.6.1 S005: Test step 2
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S005 +
( n
3
- 2 +
( n
S005_______2____
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
the Service key .
1
( n
___________5____
2
3
- 5 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
5.6
An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFF
in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for compensation.
E X RAY
1 S5
_______FFFF____
(
2 FFFF 2 n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 29
S005.2: Automatic adjustment of preheating
Performing the compensation 3. Start the automatic compensation by pressing the release button.
CAUTION
The tube assembly must be at operating temperature before the
compensation. To do this, release radiation once for 14.0 s at kV/mA
level 60/9 via service routine S001 (see page 5-21).
i NOTE
Keep pressing the release button until compensation is completed and the
new offset value for preheating is displayed. During the compensation proce-
dure, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.
E X RAY Active!
1 S5
__________2____
(
2 2 mV(VH) 2
n
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
If you interrupt the compensation procedure prematurely by letting go of the
release button, the message EEEE appears in selection field 2. This message
must be acknowledged with the R key.
To return to the service routine selection menu, press the Service key or
the double arrow key .
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S005.4: Fan test
5.6.2 S005: Test step 4
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S005 +
( n
(
S005_______4____
(
2 - 4 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
Testing the fan 2. Switch the fan ON by selecting code 01 with the arrow keys and confirm-
ing with the R key R R .
Code: 00 = Fan OFF

01 = Fan ON
( n
(
1 - 01 + n
__01____________
(
2
n
3
5.6
(
1 2 3
R o R
( o
z Check the fan for running noise.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 31
S005.4: Fan test
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
i NOTE
When you quit the service routine the fan is automatically switched OFF again.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S005.5: Temperature sensor test
5.6.3 S005: Test step 5
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S005 +
( n
(
S005_______5____
(
2 - 5 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 5 is selected, selection field 1 displays the single tank
temperature in °C. The display is updated once per second.
1 31.5C S5
__31.5_C________
(
2 5 n
3
1 2 3
5.6
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 33
S005.6: Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank
5.6.4 S005: Test step 6

Upon explicit customer request, the monitored pulse/pause ratio can be dis-
abled in exceptional cases. This can be done one time via service routine
S005, test step 6. Re-enabling the pulse/pause monitoring function is not
possible, though. Such a one-time disablement can be displayed on the info
screen and in the detail query by entering "PulsePause-Disable".
CAUTION
The execution of this service routine is irreversible. The system is
operated beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an
X-ray tube assembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires.
SIRONA is able to prove this system setting after a system failure.
1 - S005 +
( n
3
- 6 +
( n
S005_______6____
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
the Service key .
1
( n
___________5____
2
3
- 5 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
The status of the pulse/pause treatment is displayed in the selection

field 1:
båÖäáëÜ
01 = Pulse/pause monitoring enabled
00 = Pulse/pause monitoring disabled
( n
1 - 01 +
( n
______01________
2
3
6
( n
1 2 3
R
CAUTION
Disabling the pulse/pause monitoring The execution of this service routine is irreversible. The system is
operated beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an
X-ray tube assembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires.
SIRONA is able to prove this system setting after a system failure.
3. To distable the pulse/pause monitoring, select code 00 in selection field 1

with the arrow keys.
The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
5.6
( n
1 - 00 +
( n
______00________
2
3
6
( n
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 35
4. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/
LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5/3/3 PPE: Multipad
1 - 00 + S5
______00________
2
3
6
( n
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE
If pulse/pause monitoring has been disabled before already, this service rou-
tine serves as a mere status display. The arrow keys, memory key and R key
are not displayed by the XGPlus. These keys are then disabled on the
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE.
1 00 S5
______00________
2
3
6
( n
1 2 3
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S005.7: Setting continuous operation of the tube assembly fan
5.6.5 S005: Test step 7

The tube assembly fan can be configured for continuous operation at the
båÖäáëÜ
express wish of the customer This can be done via service routine S005, test
step 7. The customer should be informed in advance about the increaed noise
development to be expected. A demonstration of the fan noise can be made
with service routine S005.4.
CAUTION
Because of the expected greater contamination of the fan and of the
single tank housing, the configuration of continuous operation is
documented irreversibly on the tube assembly in order to obtain
additional information in the case of returned goods.
1 - S005 +
( n
3
- 7 +
( n
S005_______7____
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
the Service key .
5.6
n
1
___________5____
2
3
- 5 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 37
The operating mode of the fan is displayed in selection field 1:
01 = continuous operation of the fan

00 = controlled operation of the fan
( n
1 - 00 +
( n
00____________
2
3
7
( n
1 2 3
R
Switching on continuous fan operation 3. To switch the fan to continuous operation, select code 01 in selection
field 1 with the arrow keys.
The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
( n
1 - 01 +
( n
00____________
2
3
7
( n
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
4. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 01 + S5
______01________
2
3
7
( n
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 39
S007: Error logging memory
Error logging memory
Function S007 Error logging memory
Test step 1 Display error logging memory
Test step 2 Clear error logging memory Security access
Test step 5 Enabling the CAN bus logging in the Miniweb
i NOTE
In addition to Service routine S007.1, you can also use the extended detail
query in SIXABCON to check the error logging memory.
( n
(
1 - S007 + n
S007_______7____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S007.1: Display error logging memory
5.7.1 S007: Test step 1
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S007 +
( n
(
S007_______1____
(
2 - 1 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
2. Select the desired error event (in example 66).
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen You can browse between the different occurred error numbers with the arrow
keys in selection field 1.
The corresponding error message is displayed in selection field 2 (see
section 2.5). Selection field 3 displays the date and time of the error event.
1
2
- 66
E6 81 07
+
(
1
n
You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the
patient symbol keys.
3 2004-12-14; 12:31:09
Step width 100

Step width 10
Step width 1
5.7
The currently selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is preset (left
patient symbol key is lit).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 41
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad You can browse between the different occurred error numbers with the arrow
keys in selection field 1. You can display the error code, time or date of the
error event with the arrow keys in selection field 2.
66______E6_81_07
( n
Date
66______05-01-17
1 2 3
(
( n
1 2 3
Time
66______13:30:57
(
(
n
1 2 3 Browse forward
( Error code
(
66______E6_81_07 65______E7_11_08
( n
( n
1
( 2 3 1 2 3
Browse back
You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the
first three patient symbol keys (starting from the left).
Step width 100

Step width 10
Step width 1
The LED above the selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is pre-
set (the LED above the left patient symbol key is lit).
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 43
S007.2: Clear error logging memory
5.7.2 S007: Test step 2
1 - S007 +
( n
(
S007_______2____
(
2 - 2 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
the Service key .
1
( n
___________7____
2
3
- 7 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
The system's readiness to clear the memory is indicated by the display mes-
sage FFFF in selection field 1. If the error logging memory does not contain
any data, 0000 is displayed.
1 FFFF S7
____FFFF________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Clear error logging memory 3. To clear the memory, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/
båÖäáëÜ
1 FFFF S7
____FFFF________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
1 0000 S7
____0000________
2
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
R
5.7
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 45
5.7.3 S007: Test step 5
CAUTION
This service routine should be executed only in consultation with and
with the support of the SIRONA Customer Service Center!
1 - S007 +
( n
(
S007_______5____
(
2 - 5 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
Activation of logging 2. Select the desired setting using the arrow keys of selection field 1:
– WS CAN bus off (factory setting): Logging switched off

– WS CAN bus on: Logging switched on
– WS CAN bus Ex. on: Extended logging switched on
After the test step has been selected the Test key T (XGPlus) or the
LED above the Test key T (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
3. To activate the logging function, press the Test key T T .
11 - WS CAN bus on + S7
WS_CAN-B US _ ON
5
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
(
T
T
n
)
All CAN bus events occurring from now on during operation of the system
will be logged and can be displayed with a web browser (e.g. Internet
Explorer). This log will help you when consulting the SIRONA customer
service center for error diagnosis.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Displaying the log with a web browser Enter the following web address on a PC (with internet access) integrated
in a system network:
båÖäáëÜ
http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8051/CAN
IP address of the unit
The CAN bus protocol is displayed in the browser and can be saved as
HTML page, printed out of sent to the SIRONA customer service center.
Example for the first 4 pages of an extended log

(WS CAN bus Ex. on)
0758148.440; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
CAN-Bus State Bit
CAN-Error Comp.
Wert
0
Receiver Warn.
Receiver Error
0
0
0758150.461; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
0758154.440; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00
Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758156.441; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0758158.441; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Management Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0
0758160.464; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758170.458; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x0a
Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758172.450; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Busmode: STTP-Auto Status-Register DX81P 0758174.436; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Error 0
0758176.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bus Off 0
CAN-Controller Bit Wert 0758178.436; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
0758180.451; Tx; 0x361; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Status-Register DX42 CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758182.438; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Overrun Error 0 0758184.438; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Receiver Warn. 0 0758186.439; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Mode-Register Status-Register Interrupt-Register 0758188.439; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
CAN-Error Comp. 0 Receiver Error 0 0758190.468; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Bit Wert Bit Wert Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758192.440; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
SleepMode no Bus status bus-on Bus Error Intr no Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0 0758196.450; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0758198.450; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
AccFilter Mode single Error status no error Arbitration Lost Intr no Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758200.451; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
SelfTest Mode no Transmit Error Passive Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758204.450; Rx; 0x337; 0x08; 0xc7 0x32 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
transmitting no
ListenOnly Mode no status Interrupt Tramsmit Error 0 Status-Register DX91 0758206.464; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Receive Wake-Up Iterrupt no 0758208.455; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Reset Mode no idle Bus Off 0 0758210.468; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
status Data Overrun Bit Wert
no 0758220.467; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe0
Tx complete incomplete Interrupt CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758222.446; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Status-Register DX6
Tx buffer released Error Warning Overrun Error 0 0758224.445; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
no
Data overrun no Interrupt 0758226.461; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Receiver Warn. 0
Transmit Interrupt no 0758228.447; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Rx buffer empty CAN-Error Comp. 0 Receiver Error 0 0758230.450; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receive Interrupt no 0758232.447; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0
Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0 0758234.447; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Interrupt-Enable (nur PeliCAN- Sonst. Register 0758236.476; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758238.449; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Mode)
Tramsmit Warn. 0 TimeStamp; Typ; ID; Len; ;Data 0758240.465; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Register Wert
Tramsmit Error 0 0758084.419; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758242.450; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Clock divider (CDR): 0xc0 0758086.420; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758246.464; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Clock divider (CDR) Bus Off 0
Bus Error Intr enabled (PeliCAN-Mode) 0758088.420; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758248.460; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Arbitration Lost Intr enabled RX ErrorCounter 0 0758090.435; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758250.475; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
Status-Register DX61 0758092.421; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758254.461; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x61
Error Passive Interrupt enabled TX ErrorCounter 0
0758096.435; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758256.471; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Wake-Up Iterrupt disabled ErrorCodeCapture 0x00 0758098.431; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758258.464; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Bit Wert
Data Overrun Interrupt enabled Bus-Timing 0 (BTR0) 0x03 0758100.445; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00 0758260.463; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758104.432; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00 0758270.488; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x07
Error Warning Interrupt enabled Bus-Timing 1 (BTR1) 0x18
Overrun Error 0 0758106.432; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758272.454; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Transmit Interrupt disabled 0758108.432; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758274.455; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Warn. 0
Receive Interrupt disabled 0758110.434; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0758276.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Error 0 0758120.453; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe0 0758278.455; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758122.425; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758280.478; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
ErrCnt = 0 0758124.425; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758282.457; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Error 0
0758126.439; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758284.457; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
ErrCnt0 = 0 Bus Off 0 0758128.426; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758286.459; Tx; 0x4df; 0x08; 0xc7 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
ErrCnt1 = 0 0758132.461; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758290.460; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Status-Register DX7
ErrCnt2 = 0 0758136.430; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758296.470; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Bit Wert 0758138.429; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758298.468; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
ErrCnt3 = 0 CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758140.431; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758300.486; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
Overrun Error 0 0758142.429; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758304.469; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x03 0x00 0x61
Status-Register DX41 0758146.442; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758306.478; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
etc.
5.7
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
i NOTE
After the unit is switched off, the logging function will be deactivated again
automatically.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 47
S008: Update service
Update service
Function S008 Checking the software versions
Test step 2 Overview of the module software versions
Test step 3 Entry of a unit serial number
Test step 4 Initialize the function activation

(XG5/XGPlus only)
( n
1 - S008 +
( n
S008_______2____
(
2 - 2 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.8.1 S008: Test step 2
1 - S008 +
( n
(
S008_______2____
(
2 - 2 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S008.2: Overview of the module software versions
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The software versions currently installed in the modules are displayed on the
info screen of the touchscreen display.
båÖäáëÜ
System : V02.20.00
DX11
DX6
:
:
V00.02.56
V00.02.35
)
DX7 : V00.02.56
DX41 : V00.02.33
DX42 : V00.02.22
DX61 : V00.02.26 65
DX81 : V00.02.28
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the message
SYSTEMSOFTWARE.
Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-
firm your selection by pressing the Memory key .
SYSTEMSOFTWARE __ The software version of the selected module is displayed in selection field 1.
( n
1 2 3
(
( n
DX11____________ V02.18.00_______
( n
( n
1 2 3 1 2 3
5.8
To return to the module selection menu, press the Service key .
To return to the Main menu, press the arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
To return to the module selection menu, press the up arrow key above
selection field 3.
To return to the service routine selection menu and then to the Main menu,
press the up arrow key above selection field 3 repeatedly.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 49
S008.3: Input/confirmation of unit serial number
5.8.2 S008: Test step 3
1 - S008 +
( n
(
S008_______3____
(
2 - 3 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
This test step is required...

z if a software update is performed...
for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: from V02.18.1 to a higher version

for XGPlus: from V02.19 to a higher
version.
The value X is then displayed in selection field 1 of service routine
S008.3 (and with the arrow keys for the XGPlus ). When opened, the
routine is initially in the editing mode for entry of the unit serial number
(case A).
z if modules have been replaced. In this case, the backup copy of the unit
serial number still stored in the unit must be reconfirmed (case B).
If this service routine is called up with a valid unit serial number, the possibility
of entering or confirming the serial number will be deactivated. The valid serial
number is displayed in selection field 1.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Case A: 1. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit (e.g. 00123).
Entry of a unit serial number
2. Select the first digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selection
field 1 (from the left in example 1) and accept this value with the
båÖäáëÜ
R key R R .
( n
1 - 1 +
( n
1___ ___________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
R
( o
)
o
1X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the second digit of the serial num-
ber can be selected.
( n
1 - 1X +
( n
1X_____________
3
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
R
3. Select the second digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selec-
5.8
tion field 1 (from the left in example 2) and accept this value with the
R key R R .
( n
1 - 12 +
( n
12______________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
R
( o
)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 51
12X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the third digit of the serial number
can be selected.
( n
1 - 12X +
( n
12X_____________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
4. Repeat this procedure until the complete unit serial number has been en-
tered.
5. Save the unit serial number with the Memory key .
( n
1 - 123X +
( n
123X ____________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
The complete serial number is displayed for review. The system automatically
changes the entry to a 9-digit number by adding leading zeroes at the left.
( n
1 - 000000123 +
( n
000000123_______
3
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
R
i NOTE
At this point you have the possibility of discarding an incorrectly entered serial
number. This is done by quitting the service routine without finally confirming
the serial number via the R key.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
6. Check the correctness of the unit serial number you have entered and, if it
is OK, confirm this by pressing the R key R R .
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
1 S8
( n
000000123
000000123_______
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
R
( n
)
n
CAUTION
Make sure that you do not accidentally press the R key and/or the Memory key
before all digits of the serial number have been entered. Otherwise an
incorrect serial number will be irreversibly entered.
Case B: 1. To confirm the displayed serial number, press the R key R R .

Confirming the unit serial number
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:Multipad
1 S8
( n
000000123
000000123_______
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
R
( o
)
5.8
o
You can interrupt this procedure with the Service key .

The unit serial number will then not be confirmed.
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 53
S008.4: Initialize the function activation
5.8.3 S008: Test step 4 (XG5 / XGPlus only)
XGPlus: Touchscreen on Easypad XG 5: Multipad
1 - S008 + S8
(n
(
S008_______4____
(
2 - 4 +
n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step has been selected, there are two possibilities:
z It is possible to initialize the function activation (case A)
z It is not possible to initialize the function activation (case B)
Case A: Initialization of function activation

is possible
1 S8
_________________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
R
Case B: Initialization of function XGPlus: Touchscreen on Easypad XG 5: Multipad

activation is not possible
1 FFFF S8
FFFF____________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
If it is possible to initialize the function activation, then the Memory key
(XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG5) will light up at this
point.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S008.4: Initialize the function activation
Performing initialization 2. To initialize the function activation, first press the Memory key
(R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG5) lights up) and then the
R key R R .
båÖäáëÜ
1 S8
_________________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o R
( o
Quitting the service routine For XGPlus:
Via the Service or double-arrow key you can return to the menu for
selecting the service routines.
From the Service menu, you can enter the Main menu via the double-arrow
key .
For XG 5:
You can return to the menu for selecting the service routines with the up
arrow key above selection field 3.
From the Service menu, you can return to the Main menu via the up arrow
key above selection field 3.
5.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 55
S009: Initializing the flash file system
Flash file system
Function S009 Flash file system
Test step 4 Initializing the flash file system Security access
i NOTE
If the flash file system is initialized, the contents of the Error logging memory
are also lost.
( n
(
1 - S009 + n
S009_______4____
(
2 - 4 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.9.1 S009: Test step 4
1 - S009 +
( n
S009_______4____
2
3
- 4 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S009.4: Initializing the flash file system
the Service key .
båÖäáëÜ
1
( n
___________9____
2
3
- 9 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step has been selected the Memory key (XGPlus) or the
LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
Initializing the flash file system 3. To initialize the flash file system, first press the Memory key
(R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up)
and then the R key R R .
1 S9
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
5.9
n o
R o
Flash file system formatting in progress. This process takes approx. 5 - 6 min.
and is visualized by a progress indicator. The end of this process is indicated
by the message 0000 in selection field 2. The Memory key (XGPlus) or
the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
1 S9
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 57
S009.4: Initializing the flash file system
When the initialization has been completed, 0000 is displayed in the selection
field.
1 S9
0000____
(
2 0000 4
n
3
1 2 3
R
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S012: CAN bus service

CAN bus service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S012 CAN bus service
Test step 2 Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules
Test step 3 Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
Test step 4 Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of modules
i NOTE
The CAN bus service is not yet implemented for module DX11.
(n
1 - S012 +
( n
S012_______2____
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
5.10
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 59
S012.2: Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules
5.10.1 S012: Test step 2
i NOTE
Before querying the CAN status register for the modules, you should first reset
the registers via service routine S012.3 (see page 5-63).
1 - S012 +
( n
S12
S012_______2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
The selected module is displayed in the selection field 1.
Selecting a module 2. Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
( n
1 - DX61 +
( n
DX61____________
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
T
After the module has been selected the Test key T (XGPlus) or the LED
above the Test key T (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Selecting the register 3. Press the Test key T T .
båÖäáëÜ
( n
1 - DX6
(
+ n
DX6____________
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
(
T
T
n
)
n
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The CAN status registers of the currently selected module,
e.g. "CAN-State DX6" are displayed.
CAN-State DX6
i NOTE
CAN-Error Comp.
Overrun Error
:
:
0
0
) If values deviate from zero, this indicates a problematic CAN bus connection.
Receiver Warn. : 0
Receiver Error : 0
Transmit Warn. : 0
Transmit Error : 0 65
Bus off : 0
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The first CAN status registers of the currently selected module,
e.g. "CAN-State DX6" are displayed.
( n Select the desired CAN status register using the arrow keys in selection field
1 and confirm your selection with the Memory key .
5.10
CAN _ ERROR _ COMP .__
( n
1 2 3
( o
The value of the selected CAN status register is displayed.
(
n
You can return to the CAN status register selection menu using the
up arrow key or the Service key .
0_____________
( n
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 61
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
5.10.2 S012: Test step 3
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Perform this service routine as required prior to service routine S012.2.
1 - S012 +
( n
S12
S012_______3____
2
3
- 3 +
(n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step is selected, the Memory and R keys R (XGPlus) or
the LEDs above the Memory and R keys R (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.
Clearing the CAN bus registers 2. To clear the CAN bus registers, first press the Memory key (R key
(XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the
R key R R .
1 S12
________________
(
2 3
n
5.10
3
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 63
S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules
5.10.3 S012: Test step 4
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S012 +
( n
S12
S012_______4____
2
3
- 4 +
(n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step is selected, the code for the current setting of the display
appears in selection field 1:
00 = LED display on the modules switched OFF
01 = LED display on the modules switched ON
Switching LED display on/off 2. Select the desired code using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-
firm your selection by pressing the Test key T T .
( n
(
1 - 01 + n
01______________
(
2
n
3
5.10
(
1 2 3
o
(
T
T o
i NOTE
The LEDs on the modules normally flash slowly (1 Hz) (for code 00). When
code 01 has been selected and confirmed, the CAN bus clock pulse of the
TTP protocol, which is output by the master module as a broadcast with a fre-
quency of 20 Hz, is output on the LEDs (the green life LED flashes on DX7).
Thus, by "wiggling through" all of the connectors, you can directly detect the
contact loss of the module on the CAN bus. The activation or deactivation of
this function simultaneously acts on all modules.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 65
S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S014: Rotation motor service

Rotation motor service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S014 Rotation motor service
Test step 1 Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position
Test step 2 Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position
Test step 3 Free travel of rotational drive
Test step 4 Display of light barrier signals of rotational drive
( n
(
1 - S014 + n
S014_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.11.1 S014: Test step 1
5.11
This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the pan home
position Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.
1 - S014 +
( n
S014_______1____
2
3
- 1 +
(n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 67
S014.1: Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the current status:
1 - FFFF + S14
( n
____FFFF________
(
2 1
n
3
1 2 3
R
FFFF = Position of rotation undefined

(following activation of service routine)
Moving the ring 2. Press the R key R R to move the ring to the pan home position.
1 - FFFF + S14
____FFFF________
(
2 1
n
3
1 2 3
R R
( n
)

0000 = Pan home position reached
EEEE = Pan home position not reached due to an
error state
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position
or the double arrow key
båÖäáëÜ
.
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.11.2 S014: Test step 2

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home
position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-
uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.
Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-
tem version for the cephalometer mode.
1 - S014 +
( n
5.11
S014_______2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 69
S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position
1 - FFFF + S14
( n
____FFFF________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
R

Moving the ring 2. Press the R key R R to move the ring to the ceph home position.
1 - FFFF + S14
____FFFF________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
R R
( n
)

0000 = Ceph home position reached
EEEE = Ceph home position not reached due to an
error state
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive
or the double arrow key
båÖäáëÜ
.
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.11.3 S014: Test step 3

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home
position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-
uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.
Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-
tem version for the cephalometer mode.
1 - S014 +
( n
5.11
S014_______3____
2
3
- 3 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 71
S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys
(for XGPlus):
1 - + S14
( n
________________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
Moving the ring 2. Press the arrow keys to move the ring to the right (+) or to the left (-). The
ring keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.
( n
(
1 - + n
________________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S014.4: Display of light barrier signal of rotational drive
5.11.4 S014: Test step 4

This test step realizes display of the switching state of rotation motor light bar-
båÖäáëÜ
rier V1_3.
1 - S014 +
( n
S014_______4____
2
3
- 4 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step is selected on the Easypad (with XGPlus) the
service key and patient symbol key 1 are displayed:
1 - + S14
( n
________________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
5.11
Checking the light barrier 2. Move the ring manually. Tripping of the light barrier is indicated by illumi-
nation of the patient symbol key (on XGPlus) or by illumination of the LED
above patient symbol key 1 (on XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 73
S015: Actuator service

Actuator service
Function S015 Actuator service
Test step 5 Testing of actuators 1 and 2
Selecting service routine S015 1. Use the arrow keys to selec service routine S015.
( n
(
1 - S015 + n
S015_______5____
(
2 - 5 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.12.1 S015: Test step 5

The use of this service routine is suitable for troubleshooting of motor and
cable defects. Furthermore, the possibility of performing isolated travel with
an individual drive makes it possible to release the clamping of the actuator/
rotation system and check the stiffness of the individual adjusting axes.
1 - S015 +
( n
S015_______5____
2
3
- 5 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys
(for XGPlus):
båÖäáëÜ
1 - + S15
_______________
(
2 5
n
3
1 2 3
R
Patient symbol key 1 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for actu-
ator 1; patient symbol key 2 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for
actuator 2:
Patient symbol key (XGPlus), = Light barrier located in switching
LED above patient symbol key plate
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lit
Patient symbol key (XGPlus), = Light barrier not located
LED above patient symbol key in switching plate
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) not lit
Moving the actuators 2. Press the arrow keys in selection field 1 (for actuator 1) or selection field 2
(for actuator 2) to move the actuator to the right (+) or to the left (-). The ac-
tuor keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.
5.12
n
(
1 - + n
_______________
(
2 - + 5 n
3
1 2 3
R
Using the R key R R , the system (actuators 1 and 2) can be moved back
to the pan home position. In this position, patient symbol keys 1 and 2
(XGPlus) and the LEDs above patient symbol keys 1 and 2 (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
light up.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 75
S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017: Configuration service

Configuration service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S017 System configuration
Test step 2 Configuring the hardware version Security access
Test step 3 Entering the country group code Security access
Test step 4 Selecting a language index within the language set Security access
(XGPlus only)
Test step 5 Selecting a language set index within the language set Security access
(XGPlus only)
Test step 6 Activating the remote control display Security access
Test step 8 Selecting the kVmA level series Security access
Test step 9 Configuring operaton without board DX41 Security access
Test step 10 Configuring the headrest Security access
Test step 11 Selecting the image format Security access
Test step 12 Enabling/disabling the preview image Security access

(XGPlus only)
Test step 13 Enabling/disabling the welcome screen Security access

(XGPlus only)
Test step 14 Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen Security access
(XGPlus only)
Test step 15 Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure Security access
5.13
Test step 17 Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG Security access
Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide
Test step 18 In preparation. Security access

Caution! This routine must not be activated, since it will cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
Test step 22 Deactivating/activating the PPE display after each unit power-up Security access
(XG 3 PPE only)
Test step 23 Defining the PPE display warning level after each exposure Security access
(XG 3 PPE only)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 77
S017.2: Configuring the hardware version
Selecting service routine S017 1. Use thearrow keys to select service routine S017.
( n
(
1 - S017 + n
S017_______2____
(
2 - 2 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.13.1 S017: Test step 2
1 - S017 +
( n
S017_______2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
main routine (17) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then press-
ing the Service key .
1
( n
__________17____
2
3
- 17 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Selecting the system version 3. Select the desired system version using the arrow keys of
selection field 1.
båÖäáëÜ
0001 = panoramic digital
0003 = panoramic digital/ceph left digital
0005 = panoramic digital/ceph right digital
0041 = panoramic digital, TSA (XGPlus only)
0043 = panoramic digital, ceph left digital, TSA (XGPlus only)
0045 = panoramic digital, ceph right digital, TSA (XGPlus only)
0081 = system version XG 3 / 3 PPE
(n
(
1 - 0003 + n
____0003________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
R
After the system version has been selected the Memory key (XGPlus)
or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 /3 PPE) lights up.
4. To save the selected system version, first press the
Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .
1 - 0003 + S17
5.13
____0003________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE
The set value is permanently saved as the relevant system version.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 79
Checking/setting the jumper position 5. Check the jumper settings of sockets
306 (DX61, diaphragm)(only if XG 3 / 3 PPE= 0081),

309 (DX91, ceph sensor) and
503 (DX81, ceph sensor)
on board DX1.
0001 and 0041
Socket X309 Socket X503
DX1 Jumper inside

Cephalometer not connected,
i.e. connector not plugged in
i NOTE 0003, 000, 0043 and 0045

For more information on the correct jumper
positions and CAN bus wiring, refer to sec-
tion 3.2.2. Socket X309 Socket X503
Jumper outside
Cephalometer connected,
i.e. connector plugged in
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
0081 = XG 3 / 3 PPE
båÖäáëÜ
Socket X306 Socket X309
Jumper inside Jumper inside
Socket X503
Jumper inside
Cephalometer and motor-driven diaphragm not connected,

i.e. connector not plugged in
To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .

To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .
5.13
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

To return to the Service menu, press the up arrow key above selection
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 81
S017.3: Entering the country group code
5.13.2 S017: Test step 3
z Start test step 3 in the same way as described on page 5-78 or by

pressing the Service key in test step 2.
i NOTE
If you go to test step 3 from test step 2 by pressing the Service key, the security
access confirmation will be skipped.
Selecting the country group code 1. Select the desired country group code using the arrow keys of selection
field 1.
00 = worldwide
01 = Asia
02 = USA
( n
(
1 - 00 + n
______00________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
After the country group code is selected, the

Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
2. To save the selected country group code, first press the
1 - 00 + S17
______00________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE
The setting is permanently saved.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.3: Entering the country group code
båÖäáëÜ
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 83
S017.4: Selecting the language index within a language set
5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (XGPlus only)

i NOTE
Selecting a language index 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the
desired language index.
00 = English
01 = German
02 = French
03 = Italian
04 = Dutch
05 = Spanish
06 = Russian
07 = Norwegian
08 = Portuguese
09 = Swedish
10 = Chinese
11 = Korean
12 = Japanese
(
1 - 01 + n
2 4
3
After the language index is selected, the Memory key lights up.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.4: Selecting the language index within a language set
2. To save the selected language index, first press the Memory key
(the R key lights up) and then the R key R .
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 01 + S17
2 4
3
)
)
n o
i NOTE
i NOTE
If the selected language is not contained in the installed language set, English
is set as the default language.
Quitting the service routine To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .
double arrow key .
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 85
S017.5: Selecting the language set index within a language set

i NOTE
Selecting a language set index 1. Select the desired language set index using the arrow keys of selection
field 1.
00 = German, English, French, Italian

01 = German, English, French, Dutch
02 = German, English, Spanish, Russian
03 = German, English, Korean, Japanese
(
1 - 00 + n
2 5
3
After the language set index is selected, the Memory key lights up.
2. To save the selected language set index, first press the
Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the
R key R .
1 - 00 + S17
2 5
R
)
)
n o
i NOTE
z Perform a software update to install the corresponding languages in the

system (see section 1.9).
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.6: Activating the remote control display
båÖäáëÜ
double arrow key .
5.13.5 S017: Test step 6

i NOTE
Selecting the device status 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = Remote control inactive

01 = Remote control active
( n
(
1 - 00 + n
______00________
(
2 6 n
3
5.13
1 2 3
R
After the device status is selected, the

Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 87
S017.6: Activating the remote control display
2. To save the selected device status, first press the

1 - 00 + S17
______00________
(
2 6
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series
5.13.6 S017: Test step 8
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Selecting the kV/mA level series 1. Select the desired kV/mA level series using the arrow keys of
selection field 1.
1A = 16 mA series for PAN

6 mA series for Ceph
8/10 mA series for TSA (XGPlus only)
2A = 8 mA series for PAN

4A = 8/16 mA series for PAN

( n
(
1 - 1A + S17n
______1A________
(
2 8 n
3
5.13
1 2 3
R
After the kV/mA level series are selected, the

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 89
S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series
2. To save the selected kV/mA level series, first press the

1 - 1A + S17
______1A________
(
2 8
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.9: Configuring operaton without DX41
5.13.7 S017: Test step 9

This service routine is used to configure operation of the system with or with-
båÖäáëÜ
out the module DX41. This configuration is necessary for software updates
and module replacement or board DX11 if systems with or without board
DX41 should be supported.
i NOTE
If you go to test step 9 from test step 8 by pressing the Service key ≤≤, the
security access confirmation will be skipped.
Setting configuration without DX41 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = operation without DX41

(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≥ BA)
01 = operation with DX41
(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≤ AG)
( n
(
1 - 00 + n
_______00________
(
2 9
n
3
1 2 3
R
After the device status is selected, the
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 91
S017.9: Configuring operaton without DX41
2. To save the selected device status, first press the

1 - 00 + S17
______00________
(
2 9
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.10: Configuration of headrest

The operation of the unit for the installed headrest version is configured with
båÖäáëÜ
this service routine.
This configuration is required for replacement of board DX11 and a unit hard-
ware version ≥ AG (for XGPlus systems) as well as for the installation of head-
rest version 2 in systems with a hardware version ≤ AG.
z Start test step 10 as described on page 5-80 or by pressing the Service
key in test step 9.
i NOTE
If you go to test step 10 from test step 9 by pressing the Service key, the
Configuring the headrest 1. Select the currently installed headrest using the arrow keys in selection
field 1.
00 = operation with headrest version 1 (until approx. October 2006)

(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≤ AG)
01 = operation with headrest version 2 (from approx. November 2006)
(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≥ BA)

vertical
Kopfstützenversion 1
(
(will be replaced by headrest version 2 1 - +
01 n
in 2007 and is then no longer available
as a repair part) 2 10
3
5.13
After the headrest version is selected, the
Memory key lights up.
set obliquely
toward the back
Kopfstützenversion 2
(will be available (from 2007) under the
part number: 5969741)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 93
S017.10: Configuration of headrest
2. To save the selected headrest version, first press the

Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the
R key R .
1 - 01 + S17
2 10
3
)
)
n o
i NOTE
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.11: Selecting the image format
5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 / 3 only)
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Selecting the image format 1. Select the desired image format using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = C3 = 18 x 23 cm
01 = C3F = 30 x 23 cm
XG 5: Multipad
( n
______01________
( n
1 2 3
After the image format is selected, the LED above the

Memory key lights up.
2. To save the selected image format, first press the
Memory key (LED above the R key lights up) and then the
R key R .
XG 5: Multipad
5.13
______00________
( n
1 2 3
( n
R
( o
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 95
S017.12: Enabling/disabling the preview image

i NOTE
Enabling/disabling the preview image 1. Select the code for displaying the preview image using the arrow keys of
selection field 1.
00 = Preview image disabled

01 = Preview image enabled
(
1 - 01 + n
2 12
After the code is selected, the Memory key lights up.

2. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (the R key lights up)
and then the R key R .
1 - 01 + S17
2 12
R
)
)
n o
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.13: Enabling/disabling the welcome screen
5.13.11 S017: Test step 13 (XGPlus full version only)

båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Enabling/disabling the welcome screen 1. Select the code for enabling or disabling the welcome screen using the
arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = Welcome screen disabled

01 = Welcome screen enabled
(
1 - 01 + n
2 13
3
2. After the code is selected the Memory key lights up. To save the
changes, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then press
the R key R .
5.13
1 - 01 + S17
2 13
R
)
)
n o
The welcome screen is enabled or disabled.
i NOTE
After the welcome screen is disabled all parameters of the service routine
S017.14 are reset back to the factory setting.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 97
S017.14: Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen
double arrow key .
5.13.12 S017: Test step 14 (XGPlus full version only)

i NOTE
After the test step is selected, a welcome screen line ID appears in selection
field 1.
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 0 + 14
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Enabling/disabling certain lines of the 1. Select the desired line using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
welcome screen
1 = First name
båÖäáëÜ
2 = Surname
3 = Date of birth
4 = Patient number
2
-
-
1
0
+
+
(14
n
The activation status code is displayed in selection field 2.
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
2. Select the desired status using the arrow keys of selection field 2.
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 1 +
(
14 n
5.13
3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 99
the R key R .
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 1 + 14
)
)
n o
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 100 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure
5.13.13 S017: Test step 15

båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Activating/deactivating the acoustic 1. Select the code for activating or deactivating the acoustic signal using the
signal for end of exposure arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = OFF

01 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = ON
(
1 - 00 + n
______00________
(
2 15
n
3
1 2 3
R
the R key R .
5.13
1 - 01 + S17
______01________
(
2 15
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 101
S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 102 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.17: Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG
5.13.14 S017: Test step 17

Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test,
RöV FRG
båÖäáëÜ
Selecting test step 17 1. Select test step 17 using the arrow keys in selection field 2 and confirm
your selection with the Service key .
1
(n
- S017 + S17
S017______17____
2
3
- 17 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
i NOTE
In XGPlus and XG 5 units, the default value is already displayed correctly as
soon as service routine S017.17 is opened, and therefore only need by stored.
In XG 3 units, the standard must be set as described in the following step.
1 + S17
- 02
______01________
2
3
17
( n
5.13
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 103
S017.17: Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG
For XG3 units only:

2. Select the standard for the acceptance/constancy test using the arrow
keys in selection field 1:
01 = old standard: 0.8mmCu

02 = new standard: 1.8mmCu
XG 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
______02________
( n
1 2 3
)
n
3. To save the setting, first press the Memory key (the R key or the
LED above the R key then lights up) and then the R key R R .
1 S17
______02________
2
3
- 02 + 17
( n
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o
R
( o

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 104 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.17: Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide
5.13.15 S017: Test step 17

Checking or accepting the diaphragm
configuration, worldwide
båÖäáëÜ
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Selecting test step 17 1. Select test step 17 using the arrow keys in selection field 2 and confirm
your selection with the Service key .
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5: Multipad
1
( n
- S017 + S17
S017______17____
2
3
- 17 +
( n
( n
1 2 3
( o
( o
2. When the Memory key or the LED above the Memory key lights
up, save the configuration.
This is done by pressing the Memory key first (R key or LED abo-
ve the R key lights up) and then pressing the R key R R .
Otherwise, quit the service routine once again.
1 S17
______02________
2
3
- 02 + 17
( n
5.13
1 2 3
R
( n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 105
S017.17: Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide

double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 106 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S017.22: Configuration of PPE display
5.13.16 S017: Test step 22 (XG 3 PPE only)

z Start test step 22 as described on page 5-78.
båÖäáëÜ
Enabling/disabling display of the 1. Select the code for displaying the number of remaining exposures using
remaining exposures after each the arrow keys of selection field 1.
power-on
00 = display of remaining exposures = OFF
01 = display of remaining exposures = ON (factory setting)
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______01________
( n
1 2 3
the R key R .
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______00________
( n
5.13
1 2 3
( n
R
( o
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 107
Configuration of PPE display warning level
5.13.17 S017: Test step 23 (XG 3 PPE only)

i NOTE
Defining the warning level for display of 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the number of remaining
remaining exposures after each exposures starting with which the warning (indicating the number of expo-
exposure sures left) will be displayed after each exposure.
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______30________
( n
1 2 3
2. To save your selection, first press the Memory key (the R key lights
up) and then press the R key R .
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______50________
( n
1 2 3
( n
R
( o
Quitting the service routine To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 108 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S018: Service for height adjustment

Service for height adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
Function S018 Service for height adjustment
Test step 2 Limitation of the maximum travel height
Test step 3 Undoing the maximum travel height setting
Test step 4 Check of the height adjustment sensor system
Test step 5 Setting of the minimum travel height
Test step 6 Undoing the minimum travel height setting
Selecting service routine S018 1. Use thearrow keys to select service routine S0018.
(n
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______2____
(
2 - 2 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 109
S018.2: Setting the maximum travel height
5.14.1 S018: Test step 2
Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required maximum travel height by pressing the
Up/Down keys in the user mode.
i NOTE
Programming the maximum travel height is possible only for a system height
above the upper correction switch level (> position value of 1500)!
n n
(
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Selecting test step 2 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 2
and then confirm your selection with the Service key .
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The Memory
key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
Saving the maximum travel height 3. To save the maximum travel height, first press the
1 1.342mm S18
_1342_ MM ________
(
2 2
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 110 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S018.2: Setting the maximum travel height
Setting the mechanical limit stop on the 4. Loosen nut A and slide mechanical limit stop B for the limit switch toward
unit the limit switch until it switches. Retighten nut A.
båÖäáëÜ
A i NOTE
The next time the Up key is pressed, the unit will stop 10 mm below the limit
switch.
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 111
S018.3: Undoing the maximum travel height setting
5.14.2 S018: Test step 3
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______3____
2
3
- 3 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
Undoing the maximum travel height 2. To undo the maximum travel height setting, first press the Memory key
setting (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up)
1 1.342mm S18
_1342_ MM ________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 112 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S018.4: Check of the height adjustment sensor system
5.14.3 S018: Test step 4
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______4____
2
3
- 4 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1.
1 1.342mm S18
_1342_ MM ________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
Following the selection of the service routine, the stand can be
5.14
moved up or down up to the limit switches using the UP/DOWN keys
on the control console. The "soft limit positions" set by the software are ig-
nored in this case.
The first three patient symbol keys (from the left) indicate the switching state
of the limit switches:
First patient symbol key = State of correction switch

Second patient symbol key = State of bottom limit switch
Third patient symbol key = State of top limit switch
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 113
S018.4: Check of the height adjustment sensor system
If the key (XGPlus) or the LED above the key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up, the
switch is actuated, i.e. the unit is located above the position value 1500.
XGPlus XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 114 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S018.2: Set minimum travel height
5.14.4 S018: Test step 5
Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required minimum travel height by pressing the
båÖäáëÜ
Up/Down keys in the user mode.
i NOTE
Programming the minimum travel height is possible only for a system height that is
below the lower correction switch level (< position value of 1500)!
n n
(
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Selecting test step 5 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 5
and then confirm your selection with the Service key .
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The Memory
key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______5____
2
3
- 5 +
( n
( n
5.14
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 115
S018.2: Set minimum travel height
Saving the minimum travel height 3. To save the minimum travel height, first press the
1 200mm S18
__200_ MM ________
(
2 5
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
i NOTE
The limitation of the minimum travel height is purely software based. The lower
limit switch is not adapted to the new minimum travel height!
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 116 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S018.6: Undoing the minimum travel height setting
5.14.5 S018: Test step 6
båÖäáëÜ
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The
1 - S018 +
( n
S018_______6____
2
3
- 6 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
Undoing the minimum travel height 2. To undo the minimum travel height setting, first press the Memory key
setting (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up)
1 200mm S18
__200_ MM ________
(
2 6
n
3
5.14
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 117
S020.1: Service for temple support
5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) Tabs 5
5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only)

Service for temple support
Function S020 Service for temple support
Test step 1 Change switching thresholds of the temple support
This service routine can be used to change the factory-set switching points of
the temple width measurement used for setting the jaw width (“small”,
“normal” or “large”) within certain limits.
The following drawing shows the motor position values (initial and individual
offset ranges) as well as the mechanical end stops of the temple support.
Headrest version 1
(up to unit hardware version AG)
0 34 46 60
large normal small
-10 (24) +5 (39)

L
-5 (41) +10 (56)
U
Headrest version 2
(as of unit hardware version BA)
0 31 43 60
large normal small
-10 (21) +5 (36)

L
-5 (38) +13 (56)
U
The switching point between large and normal is referred to as the lower
switching point (marked L = lower) and the switching point between normal
and small as the upper switching point (marked U = upper).
These switching points can be set via service routine S20.1 within the follow-
ing limits:
Headrest version 1 (up to unit hardware version ≤ AG):
Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5
Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+10
Headrest version 2 (up to unit hardware version ≥ BA):
Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5
Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+13
i NOTE
A negative offset shifts the respective switching threshold toward larger skulls;
a positive offset has the opposite effect.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 118 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S020.1: Change switching points of the temple support
Tab 5 5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only)
båÖäáëÜ
2
-
-
S020
1
+
+
( n
5.15.1 S020: Test step 1
1 - S020 + S20
3
- 1 +
( n
( o
5.15
After the service routine is selected, the lower switching point is displayed
in selection field 1 in the form of L: 0. The upper switching point is dis-
played in selection field 2 in the form U: 0.
1 - L: 0 + S20
2 - U: 0 + 1
3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 119
S020.1: Change switching points of the temple support
5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) Tabs 5
2. Select the desired offset for the switch-over point using the arrow keys of
the corresponding selection field (see page 5-118).
Selection field 1: Lower switching point (L)

Selection field 2: Upper switching point (U)
i NOTE
A negative offset shifts the respective switching threshold toward larger skulls;
a positive offset has the opposite effect.
2
-
-
L: -3
U: 0
+
+
(
1
n
After the offset value is changed, the Memory key lights up.
3. To save the offset values, first press the

Memory key (R key lights up) and then the R key R .
1 - L: -3 + S20
2 - U: 0 + 1
3
R
)
)
n o
Quitting the service routine Pressing the Service key or the double arrow key returns you to the
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 120 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S021: Service for motor-driven diaphragm
Tab 5 5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Service for motor-driven diaphragm
båÖäáëÜ
Function S021 Service for motor-driven diaphragm
Test step 1 Initialization of diaphragm axis
Test step 3 Perform TSA sensor adjustment (TSA) even if TSA is not configured (function test)
( n
1 - S021 +
( n
S021_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.16.1 S021: Test step 1
5.16
1 - S021 +
( n
S021_______1_____
2
3
- 1 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 121
S021.1: Initialization of diaphragm axis
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 5

in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for initialization of the
diaphragm axis.
1 S21
_______FFFF____
(
2 FFFF 1
n
3
1 2 3
T
Performing the initialization of the 2. Start the automatic initialization of the diaphragm axis by pressing the
diaphragm axis T key T T .
1 S21
(
2 1
n
3
(
1 2 3
T n T
( n
When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-

tion field 2:
0000 = Initializiation OK
EEEE = Initialization error
The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the

T key.
1 S21
_______0000____
(
2 0000 1
n
3
1 2 3
T
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 122 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S021.3: Function test of TSA sensor adjustment
5.16.2 S021: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S021 +
( n
S021_______3_____
2
3
- 3 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o

in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for initialization of the di-
aphragm axis.
1 S21
________________
3
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
T
5.16
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 123
Axis initialization of the TSA sensor 2. Start the automatic axis initialization of the TSA sensor holder by pressing
holder the T key T T .
1 S21
(
2 3
n
3
(
1 2 3
T n T
( n
When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-

tion field 2:
0000 = Initializiation OK
EEEE = Initialization error
The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the

T key T T .
1 S21
_______0000____
(
2 0000 3 n
3
1 2 3
T
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 124 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Moving the TSA sensor holder 3. Move the TSA sensor holder by alternately pressing
patient symbol keys a and d.
When key P1 is pressed, the TSA sensor holder moves to the
båÖäáëÜ
PAN/CEPH position for Set key P4 to the TSA position.
1 S21
(
2 3
n
3 a d
T
( n
a
1
d
2 3
)
n
When the action is completed, the result is displayed in selection field 2:
0000 = action OK
EEEE = action error
1 S21
_______0000____
(
2 0000 3
n
3
5.16
1 2 3
T
double arrow key .
XG 5:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 125
S032: Test function for sensor in PAN slot

Test function for sensor in PAN slot
Function S032 Test function for sensor in the PAN slot
Test step 10 Test function for sensor in the PAN slot
( n
1 - S032 +
( n
S032_______10___
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
5.17.1 S032: Test step 10
Selecting test step 10 1. Select test step 10 in selection field 2 with the arrow keys and confirm
your selection by pressing the Service key .
1 - S032 + S32
( n
(
S032_______10___
(
2 - 10 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection
for synchronized readout sequence.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 126 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S032.10: Test function for sensor in PAN slot
Selecting the synchronized readout 2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the
sequence arrow keys of selection field 1.
HSIPan3x3 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readout
båÖäáëÜ
sequence 3x3 clocked out
HSIPan4x4 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readout
HSITSA4x4 = sensor in the TSA mode with synchronized readout
( n
(
1 - HSIPan3x3 + n
HSIPAN3X3______
(
2 10 n
3
1 2 3
T
After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected the
Test key T (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key T lights up
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
i NOTE
If the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) initially
lights up, the sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position first.
To do this, press the R key R R .
i NOTE
Starting synchronized readout The sensor must be plugged in for at least 15 seconds before starting the
sequence synchronized readout sequence.
5.17
3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key T T .
CAUTION
The sensor must not be removed while the synchronized readout sequence is
active! Otherwise the electronics may be damaged.
1 Take Image... S32

TAKE_IMAGE_____
(
2 10 n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 127
Explanations on the test procedure:
The synchronized readout sequence of the sensor is performed with real data
transmissions and CAN bus commands.
The image data are analyzed in the memory of the DX11.
V500 V502 V501 It is possible to evaluate the LEDs on DX1 (IMAGE; PAN; CEPH) during the
Pan Ceph Image synchronized readout sequence.
IMAGE-LED V501:
DX1 Stand By mode = LED dark

Active synchronized readout sequence = LED lights up
CEPH-LED V502:
Sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED dark
Sensor in the Ceph slot/active synchronized
readout sequence = LED dark
PAN-LED V500:
Sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED dark
Sensor in the Pan slot/active synchronized
readout sequence = LED dark
In addition, "wiggle tests" of cables or ring rotation tests can also be per-
formed.
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:
Image Size = total size of the image
Row Length = image height in pixels
HSI-State
Image Size
Row Length
:
:
NOK
OK
:
:
26320
1314
) Nr of Rows = Number of image rows
Nr of Rows : NOK : 10 CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the
CRC Errors : NOK : 10 synchronized readout sequence
Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65 Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout
while reading image data
Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess
number of CRC errors
HSI-State
Image Size
Row Length
:
:
OK
OK
:
:
8134984
2186
)
Nr of Rows : OK : 1859
CRC Errors : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 128 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.
Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired
( n parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the
båÖäáëÜ
Memory key .
IMAGE SIZE______
( n
1 2 3
( o
The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameters
(
n is displayed.
Using the up arrow key in selection field 3 or the
OK: 8134984______ Service key , you can return to the parameter selection
( n menu.
1 2 3
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.17
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 129
S033: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Function S033 Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Test step 10 Test of the CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
( n
1 - S033 +
( n
S033_______10___
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
5.18.1 S033: Test step 10
1 - S033 + S33
( n
(
S033_______10___
(
2 - 10 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection
for the synchronized readout sequence.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 130 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S033.10: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Selecting the synchronized readout 2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the
sequence arrow keys of selection field 1.
HSIC4x4 = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readout
båÖäáëÜ
sequence 4x4 clocked out without CEPH scan
HSIC4x4M = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readout
sequence 4x4 clocked out with CEPH scan
( n
(
1 - HSC4x4 + n
HSIC4X4_________
(
2 10 n
3
1 2 3
T
After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected, the
Test key T (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key T (XG 5) lights up.
i NOTE
If the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) initially lights up, the
sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position first. To do this,
press the R key R R .
Starting the synchronized readout 3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key T T .
sequence
1 Take Image... S33
5.18
TAKE_IMAGE_____
(
2 10 n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 131
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:
Image Size = Total size of the image
Row Length = Image height in pixels
HSI-State
Image Size
Row Length
:
:
NOK
OK
:
:
26320
1314
) Nr of Rows = Number of image rows
Nr of Rows : NOK : 10 CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the
CRC Errors : NOK : 10 synchronized readout sequence
Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65 Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout
while reading image data
Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess
number of CRC errors
HSI-State
Image Size
Row Length
:
:
OK
OK
:
:
8134984
2186
)
Nr of Rows : OK : 1859
CRC Errors : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65
XG 5: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.
Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired
(
n parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the
Memory key .
IMAGE SIZE______
( n
1 2 3
( o
The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameters
( n is displayed.
Using the up arrow key in selection field 3 or the
OK: 8134984______ Service key , you can return to the parameter selection
( n menu.
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 132 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
double arrow key .
XG 5:
5.18
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 133
S034: Service for the digital cephalometer

Service for the digital cephalometer
Function S034 Service for the digital cephalometer
Test step 4 Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan sensor axis
Test step 5 Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis
Test step 6 Moving to the ceph packing position
Test step 7 Display/change ring type

(XGPlus only)
Test step 8 User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C1 and C2

Test step 9 User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F
(n
1 - S034 +
( n
S034_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 134 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S034.4: Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan sensor axis
5.19.1 S034: Test step 4
z Remove the cover from the cephalometer (see also section 1.14).
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
( n
(
S034_______4____
(
2 - 4 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 4 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of
the ceph scan sensor axis is displayed in selection field 1.
5.19
1 1500 S34
( n
____1500________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
T R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 135
Switching the test mode ON 2. Press the T key T T to switch the test mode on.
i NOTE
In the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan sensor axis is
initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
T key (XG 5) lights up and displays the test mode.
Determining the offset values 3. Move the sensor to its front position by pressing the R key R R .
i NOTE
The sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center
positions with the R key.
4. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key R R .
Wall side 5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.
Wall side
L1 L1
L2 L2
Sensor side
Room side
Room side
6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:
Ceph arm mounted on left side:

( L2 – L1 ) ÷ 2 = Offsetwert
Ceph arm mounted on right side:

59 38 399 D3352
5 – 136 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
The offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.
Ceph arm on left side:

– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.
– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.

– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.
– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.
Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you
should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculated.
( n
(
1 - 1500 + n
____1500________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
T R
8. To save the offset value, first press the Memory key

(the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then
the R key R R .
5.19
1 - 1500 + S34
____1500________
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 137
Checking the new center position of the 9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key T T .
ceph scan (sensor axis)
i NOTE
The offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.
10. Move the sensor to its referenz position by pressing the R key R R .
i NOTE
The sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center
positions with the R key.
11. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key R R .
12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-
ing offset as described on page 5-136.
– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again.
Repeat the service routine from item 2.
– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.
z Continue with service routine S034.5.

double arrow key .
XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 138 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S034.5: Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis
5.19.2 S034: Test step 5
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
( n
(
S034_______5____
(
2 - 5 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 5 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of
the ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis is displayed in selection field 1.
1 1500 S34
( n
____1500________
(
2 5
n
3
1 2 3
T R
5.19
Switching the test mode on 2. Press the T key T T to switch the test mode on.
i NOTE
In the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan secondary dia-
phragm axis is initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus) or the
LED above the T key (XG 5) lights up and displays the test mode.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 139
Determining the offset values 3. Move the secondary diaphragm to its front position by pressing the
R key R R .
i NOTE
The secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its
front and center positions with the R key.
4. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the

R key R R .
5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.
Wall side
Wall side
L1 L1
L2 L2
Secondary diaphragm side

Room side
Room side
6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:

Ceph arm on right side:

59 38 399 D3352
5 – 140 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
The offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.

– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room
center.
– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.

– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.
– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room
center.
Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you
should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculated.
( n
(
1 - 1500 + n
____1500________
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
T R
8. To save the offset value, first press the Memory key

(the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then
the R key R R .
5.19
XG 5: Multipad
1 - 1500 +
____1500________
(
2
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 141
Checking the new center position of the 9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key T T .
ceph scan (secondary diaphragm axis)
i NOTE
The offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.
10. Move the secondary diaphragm to its referenz position by pressing the
R key R R .
i NOTE
The secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its
front and center positions with the R key.
11. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the
R key R R .
12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-
ing offset as described on page 5-140.
– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again.
Repeat the service routine from item 2.
– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.
z Reattach the ceph cover.

double arrow key .
XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 142 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S034.6: Moving to the ceph packing position
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
( n
(
S034_______6____
(
2 - 6 + n n
3
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After the test step is started, an inactive progress indicator is displayed in

selection field 1. Selection field 2 shows the characters FFFF.
1 S34
_______FFFF____
(
2 FFFF 6
n
3
1 2 3
T
Moving to the ceph packing position 2. Press the T key T T .
5.19
The cephalometer moves to the packing position. The procedure is visu-
alized by an active progress indicator in selection field 1. Once the proce-
dure is completed, the characters 0000 appear in selection field 2.
1 - + S34
(
2 6
n
3
(
1 2 3
T n T
( n
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 143
S034.6: Moving to the ceph packing position
When the cephalometer has reached its packing position, 0000 is displayed
in selection field 2.
1 S34
_______0000____
(
2 0000 6 n
3
1 2 3
T

double arrow key .
XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 144 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S034.7: Display/change ring type
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
2
3
- 7 +
( n
( o
2. Select the ring type using the arrow keys of selection field 1:
01 = old ring type = PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056

PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104
02 = new ring type = PAN units with serial no. 20056 and higher
PAN/CEPH units with serial no. 40104 and higher
1
S34
2
3
- 01 +
( n
5.19
R
3. To save the setting, first press the Memory key (R key lights up)
and then press the R key R R .
1 S34
2 - 01 + 7
R
)
)
n o
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 145
S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2
double arrow key .
5.19.5 S034: Test step 8 (XGPlus and full version only)

In CEPH programs C1 and C2 for full-version XGPlus systems, the shadowing
limit set by default can be provided with an individual offset. In this way the
shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.
For C1/C2
+30,000 μm
Shadowing limit
-15,000 μm
The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting

from the default setting, an offset can be selected and saved within a range
of +30,000 μm to -15,000 μm.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 146 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
2
3
- 8 +
( n
( o
2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1
(step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the
shadowing limit).
(
1 5500
- + n
2 8
5.19
1 - 5500 + S34
2 8
R
)
)
n o
4. Take a C1 or C2 exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting

(see operating instructions).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 147
S034.9: Determining the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F
double arrow key .
5.19.6 S034: Test step 9 (XGPlus and full version only)

In CEPH programs C3 and C3F for full-version XGPlus systems, the shadow-
ing limit set by default can be provided with an individual offset. In this way the
shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.
For C3 and C3F
+15,000 μm
Shadowing limit
-30,000 μm
The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting

from the default setting, an offset can be selected and saved within a range
of +15,000 μm to -30,000 μm.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 148 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S034 + S34
2
3
- 9 +
( n
( o
2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1
(step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the
shadowing limit).
(
1 -2500
- + n
2 9
5.19
1 - -2500 + S34
2 8
R
)
)
n o
4. Take a C3 or C3F exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting

(see operating instructions).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 149
double arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 150 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S037: Network service

Network service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S037 Network service
Test step 1 Showing the network data
Test step 2 Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default Security access
subnet mask
Test step 3 Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC) Security access
Test step 4 Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask Security access
Selecting service routine S037 z Use the arrow keys to select service routine S037.
(
n
1 - S037 +
(n
S037_______1____
(
2 - 1 +
n
3
1 2 3
5.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 151
S037.1: Displaying the network data
5.20.1 S037: Test step 1
1 - S037 +
( n
S037_______1_____
2
3
- 1 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
The IP address of the unit is displayed.
1 192.168.15.240 S37
X192.168.15.240_
(
2 DEFAULT 1
n
3 a
1 2 3
XGPlus:
DEFAULT or STATIC or IS DHCP is displayed in selection field 2.
DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
DHCP = automatic address allocation
Bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or
STATIC.
X = DEFAULT= fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
D = DHCP = automatic address allocation
Patient symbol key a (XGPlus) or the LED above

patient symbol key a (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 152 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S037.1: Displaying the network data
Displaying the network data 2. You can display different network data in selection field 1 by pressing
patient symbol keys a, b and c.
a b c d
båÖäáëÜ
a : Display of the IP address
XG Plus b : Display of the standard gateway
c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
selected patient symbol key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) is lit.
XGPlus:
Bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or
STATIC.
X = DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
D = DHCP = automatic address allocation
i NOTE
If all network data is set to DEFAULT, the system is in the UDP boot mode.
5.20
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 153
S037.2: Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default subnet mask
5.20.2 S037: Test step 2
1 - S037 + S37
( n
S037_______2____
2
3
- 2 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
1
( n
__________37____
2
3
- 37 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
After test step 2 is selected, the network data display appears as in test
step 1. In addition, the Memory key and R key R R are also
displayed. The Memory key is lit.
1 192.168.15.178 S37
S192.168.15.178__
(
2 STATIC 2
n
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 154 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Checking the network data 3. Check the network data still in the system before resetting.
a b c
båÖäáëÜ
b : Display of the standard gateway
XGPlus c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
Resetting the network data 4. To reset the network data, first press the
i NOTE
The network data cannot be reset selectively. All network data are reset.
1 - 192.168.15.178 + S37
S192.168.15.178__
(
2 - STATIC + 2
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
( o
The default network data is displayed. To switch between the display of

the different network data, proceed as in test step 1.
5.20
i NOTE
It is possible to reset the network address to the default value only in the fixed
address boot mode (no DHCP).
1 - 192.168.15.178 + S37
X192.168.15.178__
(
2 - DEFAULT + 2
n
3
1 2 3
R
5. Switch the unit off and then on again.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 155
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 156 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S037.3: Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)
5.20.3 S037: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ
1 - S037 +
( n
S037_______3_____
2
3
- 3 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
The current boot mode of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.
1 - STATIC + S37
_STATIC__________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
Selecting the boot mode 2. Using the arrow keys in selection field 1, select the desired
5.20
boot modeDHCP or fixed address (STATIC).
( n
1 - DHCP +
( n
_DHCP__________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 157
S037.3: Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)
Saving the boot mode 3. To save the boot mode, first press the
1 - DHCP + S37
____DHCP________
(
2 3
n
3
1 2 3
(
R
n
)
)
n o
R
(
o
i NOTE
If the system is reset to the STATIC mode, the network addresses will be reset
to the factory setting
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 158 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
S037.4: Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask
5.20.4 S037: Test step 4
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Performance of this service routine is not possible in the DHCP mode (T keyis
blocked).
1 - S037 + S37
(
n
S037_______4____
2
3
- 4 +
( n
( n
(
1 2 3
o
( o
1
(
n
(
__________37____
(
2 - 37 + n n
3
5.20
(
1 2 3
o
( o
The IP address of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.
XGPlus only:
DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
DHCP = automatic address allocation
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 159
1 192.168.15.240 S37
X192.168.15.240_
(
2 DEFAULT 4
n
3
1 2 3
T
Selecting/displaying the network data 3. To select the network data you would like to edit, press patient symbol key
a, b or c:
a b c d

XGPlus
b : Display of the standard gateway
c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
1 192.168.15.240 S37
X192.168.15.240__
(
2 DEFAULT 4
n
3
1 2 3
)
n
)
The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus) or the LED above the
Selecting the network data 4. To change the selected parameter, first press the T key T T .
1 192.168.15.240 S37
X192.168.15.240__
(
2 DEFAULT 4
n
3
1 2 3
T
T
( n
)
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 160 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Selecting the octet 5. Select the desired octet 1-4 with

patient symbol keys a-d:
a b c d
båÖäáëÜ
a: Octet B1
XG Plus b: Octet B2
c: Octet B3
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE d: Octet B4
Example:
1 2 3 (Digit 1 - 3 of octet)
192.168.015.178
B1 B2 B3 B4 (Octets 1 - 4)
1 - Digit No. 3 + S37

__DIG:_3___2____
(
2 - 2 + 4
n
3
1 2 3
T R
)
)
n
n
The currently selected patient symbol key is lit.
5.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 161
Selecting the digit 6. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired
digit within the octet (see step 5).
i NOTE
The digits always refer to the selected octet only. Reprogramming the last digit
is shown here as an example.
192.168.015.178
( n
Octet 3, digit 12, with the

value 8
1 - Digit No. 12 +
( n
__DIG:12___8____
(
2 - 8 + 4
n
3
1 2 3
T R
Selection field 2 shows the value of the selected digit.
Changing the value under the digit 7. To change the value under the digit, use the arrow keys of selection field 2.
192.168.015.179
1
( n
Octet 3, digit 12, with the - Digit No. 12 + S37
( __DIG:12___9____
value 9
(
2 - 9 + n n
3
1 2 3
T R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 162 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Saving the changes 8. To save the changes, first press the

båÖäáëÜ
1 - Digit No. 12 + S37

__DIG:12___9____
(
2 - 9 + 4
n
3
1 2 3
T R
( n
)
) (
R o
n o
1 192.168.15.179 S37
S192.168.15.179___
(
2 4
n
3
1 2 3
5.20
double arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 163
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 164 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
6 Repair
Tab 6
Contents
6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor

(M1_4)/spindle ........................................................6 – 6
6.1.1 Preparing for motor replacement.......................... 6 – 6
6.1.2 Removing board DX32 ......................................... 6 – 9
6.1.3 Replacing the height adjustment motor/spindle . 6 – 10
6.1.4 Laying cables when replacing the
height adjustment motor..................................... 6 – 12
6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)...........................6 – 14

6.2.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor ..... 6 – 16
6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2).................6 – 17

6.3.1 Laying cables when replacing
actuators (M1_1/2) ............................................. 6 – 18
6.4 Replacing the headrest .........................................6 – 19

6.4.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests ..... 6 – 20

or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).........................6 – 21
6.6 Replacing the control panel...................................6 – 24

6.6.1 Laying cables when replacing the control panel. 6 – 25
6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) ..6 – 26

laser module (PAN) ...............................................6 – 28
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) .6 – 30

(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) .....................6 – 32
6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder) ....6 – 33

(for XGPlus / XG 5) ...............................................6 – 34
6.12.1 Cables and connectors for replacement
of the motor-driven diaphragm unit .................... 6 – 36

(only XG 3 / 3 PPE)...............................................6 – 37
59 38 399 D3352
6–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Register 6
6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly.......................6 – 38

6.14.1 Cables and connectors for replacement
of the tube assembly .......................................... 6 – 40
6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly)........................6 – 42
6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder...............6 – 43

6.16.1 Laying cables when replacing the
PAN sensor holder ............................................. 6 – 45
6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder.........................6 – 47
6.18 Replacing the sensor.............................................6 – 48
6.19 Replacing the light barriers....................................6 – 49

6.19.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3 ............................... 6 – 51
6.20 Replacing circuit boards ........................................6 – 59

6.20.1 Measures following replacement of boards........ 6 – 60
6.20.2 Replacing a DX11 .............................................. 6 – 64
6.20.3 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6 ..... 6 – 80
6.20.4 Check jumper on circuit board DX42
(replacement of board DX42) ............................. 6 – 90
6.20.5 Jumper position on circuit board DX42 .............. 6 – 90
6.21 Replacing cables ...................................................6 – 91

6.21.1 Laying the cable conduit on the rotating element
(applicable to cables L3, L5, L6, L11 and L12) .. 6 – 92
6.21.2 Replacing cable L7 and L8/L108*
(in cable track 2)................................................. 6 – 94
6.21.3 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap
(in cable track 1)................................................. 6 – 97
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6–3
Tab 6
59 38 399 D3352
6–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6
6 Repair
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building
installation before replacing any parts near the power supply, power
switch, board DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for han-
dling printed circuit boards (ESD).
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity

before touching any boards.
i NOTE
Open the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and note
the old adjustment values before you begin replacing boards or modules
(which contain boards).
i NOTE
After replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that
the programming of the module corresponds to the current software status of
the system. The software version for the modules can...
for XGPlus:
be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the extended detail query in
SIXABCON. You can also check the info screen in advance to determine
whether the current software constellation is permissible. If this is not the
case, the version number of the entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g.
V02.20*)
bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
SIXABCON.
Perform a software update in case of software incompatibilities (see Section

1.9).
CAUTION
When replacing modules, be sure to note which ones contain boards and fol-
low the instructions in section "Measures following replacement of boards"
starting on page 6-60. Also check whether the current ORTHOPHOS XG CD
or the Sirona dealer page contains any additional, up-to-date information on
module replacement.
CAUTION
Be sure to observe the information on action required following
module replacement. You will find this information at the end of each set of
repair instructions.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6–5
6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle Tabs 6
6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor

(M1_4)/spindle
1. 2.
A
A
C C
6.1.1 Preparing for motor replacement

z Remove the sensor and store it in a safe place.
z Switch the unit ON.
Moving the unit up and removing the z Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad
profile covers (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the slide upward and remove the cover parts
(see section 1.14):
– Intermediate piece
– Profile covers, top and bottom
i NOTE
Tip: When unscrewing the profile cover, press it toward the top of the unit and
let it slide down after detaching it.
i NOTE
If the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-
ually.
Moving the slide manually 1. Loosen the two screws A and remove cover B.
2. Loosen screws C on spindle holder D and turn the spindle holder with a
socket wrench (18 mm A/F):
– CW rotation of spindle = slide moves upward
– CCW rotation of spindle = slide moves downward
The spindle and slide can thus be manually moved in the vertical
axis.
59 38 399 D3352
6–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle
G
H
3. J
båÖäáëÜ
4.
DX41*
approx. 560 mm
approx. 22’’
G
H
J
* Board DX41 is omitted in unit

HW version BA and higher.
Securing the slide position z Make a mark at the position of the upper limit stop.
3. Loosen nut G on upper profile clamp H and remove upper limit stop J from
the stand.
4. Install limit stop J above the lower limit stop so that there is a distance of
approx. 560 mm ( 22’’) between the lower edge of the unit and the lower
edge of the limit stop.
z Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad
6.1
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the slide downward.
i NOTE
ually (see page 6-6).
z Switch the unit OFF and de-energize it.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6–7
Removing the remaining covers z Remove the top cover and pull connector X607 off of board DX1.
z Now remove the following cover parts:
– Arm cover, top
– Slide cover, top rear
– Slide cover, bottom rear
– Slide cover, front
Attention: FH laser cable (PAN)!
i NOTE
To prevent scratches, also remove the covers of the slide table and the drawer.
59 38 399 D3352
6–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
6.1.2 Removing board DX32
båÖäáëÜ
L3
In order to facilitate
removal of board DX32,
the bottom edge of the F
slide should be roughly
flush with the upper
bracket in the stand.
G 3.
DX32* G
L3 G
1. E
X100
2. L2
* The drawing shows board
DX32 with a unit hardware
version ≤ AG.
1. Unscrew cover plates E (bottom and top) from connection box F of board
DX32.
i NOTE
Cable L3 can remain on the top cover plate (remove the shield terminal if nec-
essary). The cover plate can simply be folded to the side and stored laterally in
6.1
the stand.
z Pull connector X2 off of board DX32 and detach the protective ground
wire.
2. Detach cable L2 from the cable tie and from terminal X100 and pull it out
of connection box F toward the bottom.
3. Loosen the four screws (G) and remove the connection box
including board DX32.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6–9
6.1.3 Replacing the height adjustment

motor/spindle
1. 2.
K
L
D
3.
N
Removing the spindle 1. Turn spindle holder D (with an 18 mm A/F socket wrench) CCW until the
motor comes to rest on the limit stop and spindle L has been turned
all the way out of the motor. Remove the
straight pin(K).
Remove the spindle (L).
i NOTE
Tip: First pull spindle L downward along the motor, and then diagonally up-
ward and out of the unit.
Removing the defective motor z Unplug connector X402 of the motor cable from board DX1, detach the
motor cable from the cable harness and carefully pull it out of the stand.
2. Loosen the three screws (M). Remove the motor while carefully pulling
the motor cable out of the stand.
Inserting the dampers 3. Attach the new rubber pads to the new motor.
They are included in the scope of supply of the HA motor.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Installing the new motor z Install the height adjustment motor in the reverse order of removal. Please
observe the following:
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
When fastening the motor, make sure that all three screws are tightened
uniformly and protrude approx. 3 mm out of the nut.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original
positions and to reattach all cable ties and clamps
(see section "Laying cables when replacing the height adjustment motor" on
page 6-12).
Make sure that none of the cables are crushed by the cover plates
of the DX32 connection box.
i NOTE
Don't forget to install the upper limit stop in the marked position after replacing
the height adjustment motor.
ATTENTION: What to do after replacement?
– After inserting the new spindle above and below the HA motor, grease it
generously with Chesterton 622.
– Check the function of the height adjustment motor with the UP/DOWN keys
on the user interface.
– Readjust the travel height (see "Service routine S018" on page 5-109).
6.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 11
6.1.4 Laying cables when replacing the height

adjustment motor
Plugging connector X2 (cable L3) into

DX 32
Plug connector X2
(L3) into DX32.
Connecting cable L2 to terminal X100

(DX32)
Don't forget! Screw in

the varistor.
i NOTE
Varistor no longer
required after 1st quar-
ter of 2005, since
integrated in line filter
Fasten cable L2 to bottom strain relief with cable tie (on plate DX32).
Cable L2 must be run behind the EMC plate of DX32 without any loops.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Motor cable and cable L3
båÖäáëÜ
Motor cable
Cable L3
Green mark must lie in

recess. 6.1
Plug connector X402

into DX1
Lay cable in cable harness

and secure its position with
cable clamps
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 13
6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) Tabs 6
6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)
D
1.
A
2.
B
3.
Removing the covers z Remove the covers (see section 1.14):

– Top arm cover
Removing the defective motor 1. Detach the motor cable from the cable harness and pull it off of connector
X813 on board DX1.
2. Loosen the four screws A on the ring motor and remove the motor
including the screws and the serrated washers B.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)
Reusing the coupling and flywheel 3. Loosen set screws C and D and remove coupling E and absorber F from
the defective motor.
z Attach the coupling and absorber to the new motor and retighten the set
båÖäáëÜ
screws.
i NOTE
Seal set screws C and D with Loctite 242 before tightening them.
Installing the new motor z Insert the new motor including coupling and absorber in the ring.
i NOTE
While inserting the motor, turn it back and forth slightly until the pinion
engages in the ring gear.
z Use the screws and serrated washers B to screw the new motor onto the
ring securely.
4. Run the motor cable along its original path and plug it back into connector
X813 on board DX1 (see "Laying cables when replacing the ring motor"
on page 6-16).
i NOTE
Don't forget to reattach all cable ties and clamps.
Attaching the covers z Reattach the covers.
– Check the function of the ring motor.
– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
6.2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 15
6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) Tabs 6
6.2.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor
Plug in connector
X813 on DX1.
Lay motor cable in

a single loop (from
top to bottom).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)
6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Seal set screws A with Loctite 242 before
fastening them tight.
DX1
A 2.
B
C
3.
M1_1 = right
M1_1 = left
1.
– Top arm cover
Removing the defective actuator 1. Loosen the actuator cable from the cable holders and pull it off of connec-
tors X811 (AK1; M1_1) and X812 (AK2; M1_2) on board DX1.
2. Loosen set screws A on the coupling and the two screws B on the actua-
tor holder and pull the actuator including the holder out toward the rear.
6.3
Reusing the motor holder (if required) 3. Loosen the four screws (C) and remove the actuator holder from the
defective motor.
z Place the new actuator in the holder and fasten it with the four screws C.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 17
6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) Tabs 6
Installing the new actuator z Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug connectors X811 and X812 back in, lay the cables in their
original positions and reattach all cable ties and clamps (see section "Laying
cables when replacing actuators (M1_1/2)" on page 6-18).
– Check the function of the actuators.
– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
6.3.1 Laying cables when replacing actuators

(M1_1/2)
Lay cable in a
single loop and
fasten it with a
cable tie.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.4 Replacing the headrest
6.4 Replacing the headrest
båÖäáëÜ
Vertical
Headrest version 1
(will be replaced by headrest version 2
in 2007 and then no longer available as
a spare part)
1. A
set obliquely
toward the back Headrest version 1
Headrest version 2
(will be available (from 2007 on) under
the part no.: 5969741)
Removing the defective headrest 1. While holding the headrest firmly from below, loosen screw A and remove
the defective headrest.
z Pull cable L18 off of connector X1 on board DX5 (see "Laying cables
when replacing the headrests" on page 6-20).
Installing the new headrest z Plug cable L18 into connector X1 on board DX5 of the new headrest.
z Position the new headrest in the unit and screw it on loosely with screw A
until a slight stop is perceptible.

6.4
Unit software version V02.28 or higher is required to operate a unit with head-
rest version 2 (delivered from 2007 on as spare part (5969741). For this rea-
son, be sure to perform a software update after replacing the headrest. A
CD-ROM containing software version V02.28 is attached to the spare part.
For XGPlus units:

Check the headrest configuration via service routine S017.10 and make sure
that the ID is set to "02" (also see section 5.13.8).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 19
6.4 Replacing the headrest Tabs 6
Aligning the new headrest z Switch the unit ON.

z Switch the light localizers ON and align the headrest so that the MS light
beam strikes the center of the forehead support.
z Tighten screw A securely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the headrest does not turn when you tighten the screw.
– Check the function of the headrest using the forehead and temple
29 support keys on the user interface.
– No further action is required.
6.4.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests
Plug cable L13 into con-

nector X1 (DX5).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
* Shielded in unit HW version
*
2. BA and higher (see page
6-25)
L10 (X103)
DX7/DX71
L9 (X102)
Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Easypad (XGPlus)
1.
Removing the defective user interface 1. Press into slit A of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and
remove the defective user interface from the control panel.
2. Pull cables L9 and L10 off of connectors X102 (L9) and X103 (L10) on
board DX7/DX71.
6.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 21
6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 6
3.
B
C
Installing the new user interface 3. Check the defective cover whether a grounding strap ist present.
– If not, (for ORTHOPHOS XG3 and XG5) cut off the projekting length B
of the gounding strap C from the new cover.
– If so, (for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus) insert grounding strap C from the new
cover into the Easypad.
Remove old adhesive strip. Clean the adhesive surface and adhere
grounding strap C.
z Plug the cables of the new user interface into connectors X102 (L9) and
X103 (L10) on board DX7/DX71 and clip the new user interface onto the
control panel.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
– Since board DX7/DX71 is always replaced along with the user interface,
be sure to also observe the
“Measures following replacement of boards“ (see section 6.20.1)
- Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the

function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON
all of the display elements must light up briefly!)
Easypad (XGPlus only):

– Perform a software update to the current system version (see section 1.9).
Following replacement of the Easypad, the language set on baord DX7

is set to the factory setting by default (00 = German, English,
French, Italian). If the configured unit language set
(displayable via service routine S017.5 or the "extended detail
query“ in SIXABCON) has any configuration other than 00, this
configuration will be copied to DX7 by the update.
6.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 23
6.6 Replacing the control panel Tabs 6
6.6 Replacing the control panel
C 4.
1.
B
2. A
Removing the user interface z Remove the user interface (see page 6-21).
Removing the defective control panel 1. Swing folding mechanism A for the user interface all the way up. This
makes it easier to remove the cover.
2. Press into slit B of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and
remove the cover.
3. Detach cables L9 and L10 from the strain reliefs.
4. Rotate the control panel to the center position and loosen the four screws
C.
z Pull the cables out of the control panel and remove the panel.
Installing the new control panel z To install the control panel and the user interface, follow the procedure for
removing them in reverse order.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug connectors X102 and X103 back into board
DX7/DX71, lay the cables in their original positions and reattach the strain re-
liefs (see "Laying cables when replacing the control panel" on page 6-25).
– Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the

function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON
all of the display elements must light up briefly!)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.6 Replacing the control panel
6.6.1 Laying cables when replacing the control

panel
båÖäáëÜ
Up to unit hardware version AG (until approx. Oct. 2006)
L10
(green)
L9 (gray)
Reattach the strain

reliefs.
From unit hardware version BA (since approx. Nov. 2006)
L9
(gray)
L10
(green)
Reattach the strain

reliefs.
6.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 25
6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) Tabs 6
6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer

(PAN)
1. DX1
3. A B
2.
A
4. C
B
Removing the covers z Remove the covers (see also section 1.14):
– Top arm cover
1. Pull the cable of the FH laser module off of connector X807 on board DX1.
z Detach the cover (see also section 1.14):
– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer
off toward the front.
Removing the defective laser module 2. Detach the cable from the strain reliefs.
3. Loosen the two screws (A) and remove the holder including the laser
module (FH).
4. Loosen the two screws (B) and carefully pull laser module C out of the
holder toward the front.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN)
Installing the new laser module z Insert the new laser module (FH) in the holder and retighten screws B.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.
z Screw the holder securely back onto the cover with screws A and reattach
the strain reliefs.
z Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover and plug the cable
of the new FH laser module into connector X807 on board DX1.
i NOTE
Before reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the FH light localizer.
Adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) z Switch the unit ON.

z Switch the light localizers ON.
z Loosen screws A slightly and align the laser module (FH) including the
holder so that the FH light beam runs parallel to the edge of the tube as-
sembly light localizer C (visible here in the mirror).
z Tighten screws A securely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the holder does not turn when you tighten the screws.
C
z Check the light localizer again and perform a correction if necessary.
Attaching the covers z Reattach the top arm and front slide
covers.
6.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 27
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN) Tabs 6

laser module (PAN)
DX1
1.
– Top arm cover
z Pull the cables of the laser modules (FH+MS) off of connectors X807 (FH)
and X811 (MS) on board DX1.
z Detach the cover (see also section 1.14):
– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer
off toward the front.
Removing the defective laser module z Detach the cable from the cable holder.
1. Loosen the two screws A and carefully remove the laser module (MS) to-
ward the front.
Installing the new laser module z Insert the new laser module (MS) in the holder and tighten the screws A
loosely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run horizontally.
z Plug the cable of the new MS laser module into connector X811 on board
DX1 and run the cable in the cable holder.
i NOTE
Before reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the MS light localizer.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN)
Adjusting the MS light localizer (PAN) z Insert a bite block in the support piece.
z Switch the unit ON.
z Switch the light localizers ON and align the laser module (MS) so that the
båÖäáëÜ
MS light beam (C) strikes the center of the bite block or support piece.
z Tighten screws A securely.
i NOTE
Be careful not to turn the laser module any more when tightening the
screws.
C
29
Attaching the covers z Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover.
z Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X807 on board
DX1.
z Reattach the top arm and front slide covers.
6.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 29
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) Tabs 6
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer

(Ceph)
Cable holder and

cable ties
1.
A
Laser module
– Cover of cephalometer
– Outer cover of secondary diaphragm
CAUTION
Do not under any circumstances remove or move the secondary
diaphragm! Otherwise the system will require readjustment.
Removing the defective laser module z Pull the cable of the Ceph laser module off of connector X407 on board
DX91 and detach the cable from the cable ties and holder.
1. Loosen screw A and remove the FH laser module (Ceph).
Installing the new laser module z Insert the new laser module (FH) and tighten screw A loosely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.
z Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X407 on board
DX91.
z Lay the cable in its original position and secure it there with cable ties.
i NOTE
Before reattaching the cover of the secondary diaphragm, you must adjust the
Ceph light localizer.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph)
Adjusting the Ceph light localizer (FH) z Switch the unit ON.
z Switch the light localizers ON.
z Align the Ceph (FH) laser module so that FH light beam C runs horizontal
båÖäáëÜ
between the ear plugs (tolerance: ± 1.5 mm).
z Tighten screw A securely.
60 70 80 90 100 110 120

i NOTE
Be careful not to turn the laser module when you tighten the screws.

C
Attaching the covers z Reattach the cover of the secondary diaphragm.

z Reattach the cover to the cephalometer.
6.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 31
6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring (for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) Tabs 6

(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present)
Light localizer
X406 X405
In XGPlus and XG 5 units with an older serial number, a light localizer is

located on the left and on the right bottom side of the ring. Both of these light
localizers must be removed for TSA operation. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Unplug the cables of the light localizers from connectors X405 and X406
on board DX61 and detach the cables from the cable clamps.
2. Unscrew the holders including the light localizers from the ring.
i NOTE
Depending on the serial number of the unit, different versions of light localizers
may be installed.
CAUTION
For "TSA ready" units, make sure that cable L20 (TSA motor) and cables L21
(light barriers) are once again correctly installed in the cable clamps (see page
6-45). Tighten the cables slightly if necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder)
6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder)
båÖäáëÜ
1.
Removing the defective support piece 1. Loosen the two screws (A) and remove the support piece.
Installing the support piece z Place the support piece on the tube bend and fasten it with the two screws
(A).
– Check the system adjustment via a diaphragm test exposure

PAN - Symmetry (see page 7-22).
– Perform a complete PAN unit adjustment(see chapter 4).
6.11
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 33
6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) Tabs 6

(for XGPlus / XG 5)
CAUTION
Be sure to install the diaphragm unit that matches the given unit hardware
version (see spare parts list for unit serial number and part number of
matching diaphragm). If the wrong diaphragm unit is installed, error code E6
61 70 will be displayed prior to exposure release (see Chapter 2-9).
1.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5)
Removing the defective diaphragm unit z Pull cables L11 and L12 off of connectors X501 (L11) and X101 (L12) on
board DX61 (see page 6-36).
DX61 z TSA operation only:
båÖäáëÜ
Pull cables off of connectors X203, X303, X304, X405 and X406 on board
DX61.
C 1. Loosen the upper screw (A) and the two lower screws (B) and remove the
diaphragm unit.
i NOTE
If the two lower screws are not accessible, push the lower slider (B) upward
manually. If the slider is in such an unfavorable position that it cannot be
pushed upward, then:
– Remove board DX61,
– Loosen the 4 screws on motor C and raise it together with the spindle.
B
DX61
Installing the new diaphragm unit z Start by fastening the new diaphragm unit to the unit with screw A.
z Then screw in the two lower screws (B) and carefully tighten
them securely (to a torque of 80 Ncm);
Caution! Aluminum housing.
z Plug cables L11 and L12 onto connectors X501 (L11) and X101 (L12) on
board DX61 (see "Cables and connectors for replacement of the mo-
tor-driven diaphragm unit" on page 6-36).
z For TSA operation:
Plug cables back onto connectors X203 (motor cable L20), X303 (light
barrier cable L21), X304 (light barrier cable L21), X405 (laser light localiz-
er 1 TSA) and X406 (laser light localizer 2 TSA) on board DX61 (see "Ca-
bles and connectors for replacement of the motor-driven diaphragm unit"
on page 6-36).
6.12
– Since board DX61 is always replaced along with the diaphragm unit, also
be sure to observe the “Measures following replacement of boards“
(see section 6.20.1).
– Perform a complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later evaluation by an expert.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 35
6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) Tabs 6
6.12.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the

motor-driven diaphragm unit
X101 (L12) X501 (L11)
X203
(L20)
X406 X405 X304 X303

(L21) (L21)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm (only XG 3 / 3 PPE)

(only XG 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
A A A A
Removing the defective diaphragm unit 1. Loosen the two screws (A) (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed
diaphragm upward.
Installing the new diaphragm unit z Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.

6.13
– Take PAN diaphragm test exposures (see page 7-17)

(e.g. for possible later evaluation by experts).
– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 37
6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly Tabs 6
6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
1. 2.
C C
D D
A
Removing the diaphragm unit z Remove the diaphragm unit

(see section 6.12).
Removing the defective tube assembly 1. Loosen the four screws A and remove cover plate B incl. the cable shield-
ing (L3). Caution! Also pull cable L3 off of connector X3 and the
ground cable off of connector X304 on board DX6.
(see page 6-40)
i NOTE
The ferrite core and cable shielding can remain on the cover plate.
z Detach cables L5 and L6 from the strain reliefs and pull the cables off of
sockets J6 (L5) and J2-J3 (L6) on board DX6 (see page 6-40).
2. Loosen the two rear screws (C) on the tube assembly.
Hold the tube assembly firmly in place (caution: heavy!), loosen the two
front screws (D) and remove the tube assembly toward the front.
i NOTE
Tip: If you leave the two front screws on the rotating element, you can imme-
diately hang the tube assembly on them when reinstalling it.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
Installing the new tube assembly z Hang the new tube assembly on the two front screws of the rotating ele-
ment and tighten them securely.
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Make sure that the cables of the diaphragm unit once again lie in their original
position (see section 6.21 page 6-41), as they could otherwise get in the way
while you're attaching the covers later on.
z Insert the two rear screws and tighten them firmly.

z Plug cables L3, L5 and L6 as well as the ground cable back onto board
DX6 and reattach the cables to the strain reliefs.
z Attach the cover plate.
Installing the diaphragm unit z Install the diaphragm unit

(see section 6.12).
– Since board DX6 is always replaced along with the tube assembly, also
– Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only);

without consulting an expert
– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later evaluation by an expert.
6.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 39
6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly Tabs 6
6.14.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the

tube assembly
Laying cables cor-

rectly on the cover
plate
Unplug/plug in cable L6 (socket

J2-J3 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in cable L5 (socket

J6 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in ground cable

(connector X304 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in cable L3
(connector X3 on board DX6)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
båÖäáëÜ
Cable routed on left side Cable routed on right side of
of tube assembly: 2x L21, tube assembly: L12, L20 (TSA
L11 and TSA laser light motor) and TSA laser light local-
localizer izer
6.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 41
6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly) Tabs 6
6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly)
1.

Replacing the fan 1. Loosen the four screws A and carefully remove the cover plate including
the fan. Caution: Cable!
z Pull the fan cable off of connector X2 on board DX6.
Connector X2
z Install the new fan in the reverse order of removal.
– Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4

(see section 5.6.2).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
båÖäáëÜ
Rigid sensor holder TSA sensor holder
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE + XGPlus basic class) (XGPlus comfort class)
1. 1.
2. A 2. A
B
B
4. 4.
C
C
3. 3.

– Sensor holder cover, large
z Remove the sensor. 6.16
Removing the defective sensor holder 1. For TSA sensor holder (PAN), XGPlus only: Detach motor cable L20 and
both light barrier cables (L21) from the cable tie on the unit and pull the ca-
bles off of connectors X203 (L20), X303 and X304 (L21) of the TSA sen-
sor holder.
2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the sensor holder.
Caution: Cable L13!
3. Loosen the two screws (B) and remove the small sensor holder cover.
4. Loosen the three screws (C) and remove the connection socket.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 43
6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tabs 6
5. 6.
Shield clamp
5. Detach the shield clamp (L13) on the rear side of the

connection socket.
6. Loosen the connector screw connection on the front side of the connec-
tion socket and thread the connector to the rear through the connection
socket and the sensor holder.
Installing the new sensor holder 7. Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original
position and reattach the cable shields as well as all cable ties and strain re-
liefs (see section "Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor holder" on
page 6-45).
– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see section 4.3).

The TSA adjustment also must be performed for TSA units!
– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later

evaluation by an expert.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
6.16.1 Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor

holder
båÖäáëÜ
Sensor holder, rigid (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or XGPlus basic version)
6.16
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 45
6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tabs 6
TSA sensor holder (XGPlus full version)
Lay cables on the ring!
Reattach cable ties
Draw cable back into sensor holder (no longer appli-

cable as from system hardware version BA, approx.
from November 2006)
Reattach cable shield
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder
6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder
båÖäáëÜ
3.
D
D
2. B
C
A
1.
1. Remove the sensor.
Removing the defective sensor holder 2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the connection socket B.
Caution: Cable L35!
3. Detach the cable shield from terminal C and the connector screw connec-
tion (loosen the two screws D from the rear) and thread the connector to
the rear through the connection socket.
Installing the new sensor holder z Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
Don't forget to reattach the cable shields. 6.17
– Perform the CEPH system adjustment (see section 4.4).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 47
6.18 Replacing the sensor Tabs 6
6.18 Replacing the sensor

– Since board DX81 is always replaced along with the sensor, also
– Perform a software update of the unit to version V02.20 or higher.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.19 Replacing the light barriers
6.19 Replacing the light barriers
båÖäáëÜ
unit HW unit HW
version < AG version ≥ AG
V1_3
V1_3
V1_4
V91_2
6.19
V91_1
V1_1
V1_2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 49
6.19 Replacing the light barriers Tabs 6
The following light barriers can be replaced:
In the panoramic X-ray unit z Light barrier at actuator 1, ON position: V1_1

z Light barrier at actuator 2, ON position: V1_2
z Light barrier at ring motor, starting position of rotation: V1_3
z Light barrier at HA motor, height adjustment: V1_4
In the cephalometer z Light barrier for patient diaphragm position detection, ceph: V91_1
z Light barrier for sensor position detection, ceph: V91_2
After replacing V1_1, 2 and 3:

After replacing V1_4:

– Perform a function check.
After replacing V91_1 and 2:

– Execute S034.4 and S034.5 (see pages 5.19.1 ff.)
– Check the CEPH adjustment by taking diaphragm test exposures:Fixed
point of rotation and Quickshot
– Perform a CEPH unit adjustment if necessary (see chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
6.19.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3
Removing light barrier V1_3 z Remove the covers (see also section 1.14):
båÖäáëÜ
– Top arm cover
1. Loosen the two clamping screws A on the tie rods and remove the tie rods
by pulling them B upward.
1.
B
A
2. Pull the light barrier cables (V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3) off of connectors
X802, X803 and X804 and the ring motor cable off of connector X813 on
board DX1.
2.
Pull light barrier cables off of con-

nectors X802, X803 and X804 on
board DX1
Pull ring motor cable off of con-

6.19
nector X813 on board DX1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 51
i NOTE
The three light barrier cables are bundled with a flexible tube and fastened to
the basic unit next to board DX1 or on the upper wing plate with two
cable clamps.
z Detach the cable harness (flexible tube) from the cable clamps and re-
move the flexible tube.
z Remove the ring motor (see page 6-14).
3. Loosen the screw (C) on the wing plate (Caution: The eccentric spring
is prestressed!). Unhook the spring and release it carefully. Remove the
eccentric spring D.
4. Detach the remaining screws from the wing plates and initially remove the
upper wing E.
3. C 4.
E
D
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
5. Loosen the screws from the bearing covers of the actuator spindles and
detach the spindles. Now you can remove the lower wing plate (F).
båÖäáëÜ
5.
z Position the motor mount ring so that the tensioning roller is positioned
above a recess (so that the roller can be removed from below).
6. Detach the retaining ring and the washer. Remove tensioning roller G incl.
eccentric bolt (downward).
6.
6.19
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 53
7. Loosen the screws on the right guide profile (on spring side) H and re-
move the profile including tension spring J.
CAUTION
Look out for bearing shells K. They may fall out after the profile is removed.
8. Remove bearing shells K.

9. Loosen the screws on motor mount ring L and remove motor housing M.
7. - 9.
H J
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
10. Loosen the two screws on light barrier V1_3 and remove it.
10.
båÖäáëÜ
M
V1_3
6.19
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 55
Installing light barrier V1_3 z Screw new light barrier V1_3 onto motor housing M securely.
z Reattach motor housing M to motor mount ring L and screw them together
again with the four screws.
CAUTION
Seal the screws with Loctite 242.
z Reinsert the left part of the bearing shell and bring the motor mount ring
along with the motor mount back into position.
z Reinsert the right part of the bearing shell K with the guide profile H and
the tension spring J and tighten the profile screws loosely.
z Reattach tensioning roller G to the motor housing with the eccentric bolt
from below and fasten the eccentric bolt from above using a washer and a
retaining ring.
z Pull the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the frontmost position and
fasten the front screw of guide profile H securely.
z Now push the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the rearmost posi-
tion (from the column) and fasten the rear screw of guide profile H secure-
ly.
z Slide the rotary ring back and forth another 1 to 2 times to make sure that
it glides smoothly in the guide.
i NOTE
Check to make sure that the guide profile is still sufficiently greased following
assembly. Grease the profile with Chesterton 622 if necessary.
z Reinsert the lower wing plate F.

z Insert both spindles with spindle nuts and screw the bearing cover back
on tight.
z Reinsert upper wing plate E and refasten the wing plates with the
eight screws (Note Tighten screw C for fastening the eccentric spring
only loosely!).
z Attach eccentric spring D to the eccentric bolt of the tensioning roller and
reattach it to screw C on the upper wing plate with a prestress of 2½ turns.
Tighten screw C securely.
z Reinstall the ring motor (see page 6-15).
CAUTION
Note the correct procedure for laying the cables of the ring motor.
z Now perform the cabling (see page 6-57).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Cabling V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3
12.
båÖäáëÜ
11.
13.
Properly run cable

harness
z Run the light barrier cables together next to the ring motor and pull the
flexible tube over them.
11. Secure the flexible tube at the motor end with a cable tie and fasten it to
the wing plate with the cable clamp. 6.19
12. Twist the flexible tube (only the tube, not the cables!) clockwise at the con-
nector end, secure it with a cable tie and fasten it to the basic unit next to
board DX1 with the cable clamp.
13.
CAUTION
In its installed state, the cable harness (flexible tube) must exhibit a tendency
to move upward and form a loop during travel of the rotary ring. It must dip into
the unit!
Also make sure that the cable harness is refastened to the cable clamps in its
original position.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 57
z Plug the ring motor cable and the light barrier cables back into connectors
X813, X802, X803 and X804 on board DX1.
z Reattach the covers.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.20 Replacing circuit boards
6.20 Replacing circuit boards
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for handling
printed circuit boards (ESD).Touch a ground point to discharge
static electricity before touching any boards.
CAUTION
Replacement of printed circuit boards DX6 and DX11:
Never replace both boards at the same time. After replacing one of these
boards, first proceed as specified in section 6.20.1 and then restart the unit.
Only then may you begin replacement of the other module.
CAUTION
Prior to circuit board replacement:
Open the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and write
down the adjustment values before you start replacing the boards.
CAUTION
Replacement of circuit board DX11:
– If the old DX11 is still working:
Open the "extended detail query"in SIXABCON, search for
the "Language Set ID" (listed in "Extended Configuration DX7") and
write down the configuration of theLanguage Set Index. If it differs from 00
the Language Set Index has to be resetafter inserting a new
DX11, using the service routine S017.5
(see page 5-86).
– The replacement of circuit board DX11 also causes the loss of user
preference settings (patient symbols, quickshot pre-selections etc.).
Point this out to the user or set the original values up again after the
replacement of the circuit board, provided they could still be queried prior to
the replacement.
CAUTION
Please be sure to read the notes in Section "Measures following replacement
of boards" (see page 6-60)!
This Service Manual describes all measures required after the replacement of
modules or circuit boards, provided they were known at the time of publication.
You will find more up-to-date information and supplements concerning this
subject on the latest ORTHOPHOS XG CD and on the Sirona dealer page on
the Internet. For this reason, you should always check for the latest informa-
6.20
tion on the replacement of modules and performing updates before you start
replacing any modules or boards.
i NOTE
The connectors on the boards are labeled on delivery of the system.
Tip: Check the designations on the connectors when pulling off the cables and
label them correctly if necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 59
6.20 Replacing circuit boards Tabs 6
DX11
DX91
DX1
DX61*
DX71
DX42 DX41**
* not with XG 3 / 3 PPE

** from system hardware version BA DX32
does not apply to circuit board DX41 see page 5-9
6.20.1 Measures following replacement of boards
CAUTION
After replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that
the software version of the module corresponds to the current software status
of the system. The software version for the modules can...
for XGPlus:
SIXABCON. You can also check the info screen in advance to determine
whether the current software constellation is permissible. If this is not the
case, the version number of the entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g.
V02.20*)
for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
SIXABCON.
Perform a software update or downgrade (see Section 1.9) in case of software

incompatibilities.
Always perform the measures described below in the given sequence and do
not carry out any other actions between the steps.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
The following table provides an overview of various possible replacement sit-

uations and cross-references to detailed descriptions of the actions required
for the corresponding situations following board replacement.
båÖäáëÜ
Board Constellation Measures Page
DX1 z Inserting a new DX1
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus z Switch the unit ON. 1-22
z System software version V02.20 or higher z Perform a software update of the
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE unit to version V02.27 or higher as
described in section 1.9.
DX11 z Replacing a DX11
i NOTE
The circuit board DX11 with software version V02.22 or higher requires
SIDEXIS software version V01.45 or higher for the update. Consequently, it is necessary to update the
entire unit to
software version V02.22 or higher or SIDEXIS V01.45 or higher.
z Inserting a new DX11 z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-64

z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus tion 6.20.2, Case A.
z System software version V02.20
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus tion 6.20.2, Case B.
z System software version V02.22 or higher
z Inserting a DX11 from another unit with soft- z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-70
ware version V02.22 or higher tion 6.20.2, Case C.
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5 tion 6.20.2, Case D.
z Inserting a DX11 from another unit with soft- z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-75
ware version V02.20 or higher tion 6.20.2, Case E.
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3
CAUTION
Never use a module from another unit in an XG 3
PPE unit or vice versa.
z Inserting a new DX11 z Please proceed as described in sec-

6.20
6-77
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE tion 6.20.2, Case F.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 61

DX6 z Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6
z Inserting a new X-ray tube assembly z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-80
(Tube assembly) tion 6.20.3, Case G.
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus tion 6.20.3, Case H.
z Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from an- z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-85
other unit with software version V02.22 tion 6.20.3, Case I.
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE tion 6.20.3, Case J.
z Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from an- z Please proceed as described in sec- 6-88
other unit with software version V02.20 tion 6.20.3, Case K.
z ORTHOPHOS XG 5/3
CAUTION
Never use a module from another unit in an XG 3
PPE unit or vice versa.
DX61 z Inserting a new DX61 z Check the compatibility between the 1-24
software status of the modules and
(Diaphragm unit) that of the overall system. Perform
an update or a downgrade if neces-
sary.
i NOTE
Please note that the specific diaphragm
unit required depends on the unit serial
numbers specified in the spare parts list.
DX7 z Inserting a new Easypad incl. DX7 z It isessential that you perform a 1-24
z ORTHOPHOS XGPlus software update to a system version
(Easypad) ≥ V02.25
z System software status V02.20 or higher
(see section 1.9).
i NOTE
After the replacement of the Easypad,
the language settings on circuit board
DX7 are at the factory default
(00 = German, English, French,
Italian). If the configured system lan-
guage set (displayable via service rou-
tine S017.5 or the “extended detail que-
ry“ in SIXABCON) has a configuration
other than 00, this configuration will be
copied to board DX7 by the update func-
tion.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
(Multipad) that of the overall system. Perform
sary.
DX32 z Inserting a new DX32 z No further action is required.
(Stand)
DX41* z Inserting a new DX41 z Check the compatibility between the 1-24
(Stand) that of the overall system. Perform
sary.
(Remote control) that of the overall system. Perform
sary.
z To system hardware version < BA: 6-90
Set jumper X109 and X110 to "Con-
figuration with DX41“ (inside jumper)
(see also Section 6.20.4).
DX81 z Using a new sensor z Perform an update to an overall soft- 1-24
ware version of V02.25 or higher.
(Sensor)
software status of the module and
(Ceph) that of the overall system. Perform
sary.
z Perform service routine S034, test 5-134
steps 4 and 5.
z Perform the ceph adjustment. 4-56
* circuit board DX41 no longer applies in system hardware version BA.
Circuit board DX41 is available as a spare part for systems up to hardware version AG.
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 63
6.20.2 Replacing a DX11
CAUTION
Case A: New DX11, After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to the factory
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus setting. Make sure that no second system is running on the same IP address
System software status V02.20 before switching the system to a new IP address.
i NOTE
Do not acknowledge any error messages at this point.
2. Install the current SIDEXIS software version

(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
If the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially
released main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current
version can be installed.
3. Update the software to the latest version via the automatic update opti-
on(see SIRONA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info '
X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).
i NOTE
The current update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD.
This CD is supplied along with every spare DX11 PC board and is also inclu-
ded in the language-specific set. The contents of this CD can also be down-
loaded (under Product Info Æ X-ray Systems) from the Dealer domain of the
SIRONA internet website at www.sirona.com .
4. If several devices are installed in the network:

Set the IP address with the help of SIXABCON.
Wait approximately 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.
The error message E1 10 03 (format flash file system) is displayed.
(
E1 10 03 R
The formatting of the flash file system is started automatically. Error mes-
sage E1 10 04 is displayed during the entire process (approx. 5 - 6 min.).
E1 10 04 When the formatting is finished, the error message is automatically ac-
knowledged by the system and error message E6 11 07 (undefined sys-
5 - 6 min.
tem class) is displayed.
E6 11 07
(
E6 11 07 R
The access level for the service menu (level 4) is automatically started.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
(
8. Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light up
o
(approx. 2 s).
båÖäáëÜ
Level 4
b – d – a.
a b c d Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine
017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically.
The Memory button is lit.
i NOTE
Acknowledge any additional error messages with the
approx. 2 s ( n R key R .
10. Confirm the “Comfort“ system class (01):

To do this, first press the Memory button (R key lights up) and then
1 - 01 + the R key R .
2
R ?
)
)
n o
11. Quit the service routine via the double arrow key .
Error message E6 15 05 (undefined system serial number) is displayed.
(
E6 15 05 R
(
E6 15 04 R

16. Start service routine S008.3, check the unit serial number and confirm it if
it is correct (see page 5-50).
i NOTE
The unit serial number is located on the rating plate of the unit. 6.20
CAUTION
In case of a wrong serial number, cancel the update and contact the Sirona

(
E6 15 04 R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 65

20. Start service routine S008.4 and confirm the unit equipment.
21. Determine the ring type based on the system serial number.
PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056 = old ring type = 01

PAN unit serial numbers from 20057 = new ring type = 02
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers up to 40104 = old ring type = 01
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers from 40105 = new ring type = 02
22. Start service routine S034.7 and select the corresponding ring type (see
page 5-145).
23. Start service routine S017 and perform the system configuration (test
step 2-17) (see page 5-78).
i NOTE
For systems with hardware version< BA (until October 2006):
– Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9.
– Review the installed headrest version and adjust the configuration, using
service routine S017.10 if necessary (see page 5.13.8).
i NOTE
Inform the customer about the new possibilities of the software status, such as
welcome screen (XGPlus only) or acoustic exposure signal. Activate these
functions if they are required.
24. If the minimum travel height of the system must be limited:

Set the travel height with service routine S018.2. (see page 5-110).
25. Perform another software update to the current system software version
as described in section 1.9.3. This updates all modules in accordance
with the configuration.
26. Perform the complete system adjustment (see chapter 4):
– PAN adjustment
This generates an XML file (with the system parameters) which is saved
under the network name of the system in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder
(see also section 1.10 on page 1-32).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
CAUTION
Case B: New DX11, After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to the factory
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus setting. Make sure that no second system is running on the same IP address
System software status V02.22 before switching the system to a new IP address.
båÖäáëÜ
or higher
i NOTE

(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
3. Perform a software update to the latest software version via the automatic
update option (see SIRONA internet website, Dealer domain (under Pro-
duct Info Æ X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).
i NOTE
ded in the country set. The contents of this CD can also be downloaded (under
Product Info Æ X-ray Systems) from the Dealer domain of the SIRONA internet
website at www.sirona.com
i NOTE
If the DX11 used already has the same software version as the overall unit, a
software update to this version must nevertheless be performed so that an ad-
ministrative entry can be made in the memory of the DX11.

(
E1 10 03 R
5 - 6 min.
E6 11 07
6.20
(
E6 11 07 R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 67
(
o
(approx. 2 s).
Level 4
b – d – a.
017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started
automatically. The Memory button is lit.
i NOTE
Acknowledge any additional error messages with the R key .
(
R
approx. 2 s n

1 - 01 + the R key R .
2
R ?
)
)
n o
(
E6 15 05 R

i NOTE
CAUTION

i NOTE
In systems that already run with a system software version V02.27 or higher,
please check that there is a XML file in the PDATA/P2K_Config with the net-
work name of the system (Extended details). This file contains up-to-date in-
formation about the previous system configuration! See also section 1.10, on
page 1-32).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
page 5-145).
i NOTE
i NOTE
Inform the customer about the new possibilities of the software status, such as
welcome screen (XGPlus only) or acoustic exposure signal. Activate these
functions if they are required.

– PAN adjustment
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 69
CAUTION
Case C: DX11 from an external device, – The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus theDX11 board and the system have at least the software version
System software status V02.22 V02.22.
or higher – The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e.
the DX11 board must come from a XGPlus system if it is to be installed
in another XGPlus system
CAUTION
After inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP
address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct
IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other
device.
i NOTE
2. Install the current SIDEXIS software version (V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
3. Perform a software update to a software version V02.25, however, ideally

to the latest software version via the automatic update option (see SIRO-
NA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info Æ X-ray Systems)
i NOTE
SIRONA internet website at www.sirona.com
i NOTE

(
E6 15 05 R
(
E6 15 04 R

8. Start service routine S008.3 (see page 5-50).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
9. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit and enter it (see
page 5-50).
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
Any serial number which is unknown to the unit will not be accepted by the
unit. The serial number entered must be identical with the one on the rating
plate of the unit. If an inadmissible serial number is entered, the input will not
be accepted and the serial number can be entered again.

i NOTE
page 1-32).

page 5-145).
i NOTE

– PAN adjustment
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 71
CAUTION
Case D: New DX11, After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 the factory setting. Make sure that no second system is running on
System software status the same IP address before switching the system to a new IP address.
V02.20
CAUTION
Do not acknowledge any error messages displayed at this point!

(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
i NOTE
CAUTION

(
E1 10 03 R
5 - 6 min.
E6 11 07
(
E6 11 07 R
i NOTE
Acknowledge any additional error messages with the R key R .
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
7. Press and hold down the Service key until the LEDs above the patient
symbol keys light up (approx. 2 s).
båÖäáëÜ
(
approx. 2 s
n
b – d – a.
Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine
automatically. The LED above the Memory key lights up.
a b c d
( o
9. Confirm the “Basic“ system class (02):

To do this, first press the Memory button (LED above the R key lights
up) and then the R key R .
______02_______
( n
1 2 3
( n
R
( o
10. Quit the service routine via the Top arrow key above selection field
3.

6.20
(
E6 15 05 R
13. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the

system serial number (see page 5-50).
14. Quit the service routine via the up arrow key above selection field 3.
16. Start service routine S034.7 and select ring type 02 (see page 5-145).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 73
i NOTE
Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9 .

Set the travel height with service routine S018.2.
(see page 5-110).
– PAN adjustment
– CEPH adjustment, if installed
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
CAUTION
Case E: DX11 from an external device, – The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if
ORTHOPHOS the DX11 board and the system have at least the software version
XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE) V02.20.
båÖäáëÜ
System software status – The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e.
V02.20 or higher. DX11 must come from an XG 5 or XG 3 device if it is to be installed in
an XG 5 or XG 3 system.
CAUTION
After inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP
address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct
IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other
device.
CAUTION
2. Perform a software update to a software version V02.25, however, ideally

to the latest software version via the automatic update option (see SIRO-
NA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info Æ X-ray Systems)
i NOTE
CAUTION

(
E6 15 05 R
5. Open the Service menu (see page 5-10). 6.20

page 5-50).
i NOTE

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 75
i NOTE
page 1-32).
10. Start service routine S017 and check the system configuration or perform
the system configuration (test step 2-23) (see page 5-78).
i NOTE
For the XG 3: Service routine S017.17 must be set according to the serial
number of the unit (see page 5-103).

– PAN adjustment
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
CAUTION
Case F: New DX11, After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to
ORTHOPHOS the factory setting. Make sure that no second system is running on
XG 5/3/3 PPE the same IP address before switching the system to a new IP address.
båÖäáëÜ
System software status
V02.22 or higher. 1. Switch the unit ON.
CAUTION

(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
i NOTE
CAUTION

(
E1 10 03 R
5 - 6 min.
E6 11 07
6.20
(
E6 11 07 R
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 77
(
approx. 2 s
n
b – d – a.
a b c d
( o

______02_ _________
( n
1 2 3
( n
R
( o
10. Quit the service routine via the Top arrow key above selection
field 3.

(
E6 15 05 R
13. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the system serial number (see
page 5-50).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
page 1-32).
i NOTE
Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9.
i NOTE
For the XG 3: Service routine S017.17 must be set according to the serial
number of the unit (see page 5-103).

– PAN adjustment
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 79
6.20.3 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6
Case G: New X-ray tube assembly, 1. Switch the unit ON.

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
System software status CAUTION
V02.20 Do not acknowledge any error messages displayed at this point!
2. Perform a software downgrade (via the main version) of the X-ray tube
assembly or board DX6 to software status V02.20 as described in section
1.9.3.
CAUTION
At this place do not perform any software update to a higher version!

Error message E6 11 07 (undefined system class) is displayed.
(
E6 11 07 R
The access level for the service menu is automatically started.
i NOTE
(
o
(approx. 2 s).
Level 4
b – d – a.
approx. 2 s ( n

1 - 01 + the R key R .
R ?
)
)
n o
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
(
E6 15 05 R
(
E6 15 04 R

i NOTE
CAUTION

(
E6 15 04 R

17. Start service routine S008.4 and confirm the unit equipment.
i NOTE
If the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-
leased main version of SIDEXIS
has to be installed before the current version can be installed.
21. Perform a software update to Version V02.27 or higher (automatic up-

6.20
date) (see also section 1.9.5).
– PAN adjustment
23. Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only);
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 81

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Case H: New X-ray tube assembly, 1. Switch the unit ON.

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
2. If the software status of the newly installed DX6 board is not compatible
System software status
with the current overall system software version, perform a software up-
båÖäáëÜ
V02.22 or higher.
date to the current system version as described in section 1.9.3.
(
E6 11 07 R
i NOTE
(
o
(approx. 2 s).
Level 4
b – d – a.
approx. 2 s ( n

1 - 01 + the R key R .
R ?
)
)
n o

6.20
(
E6 15 05 R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 83

i NOTE
CAUTION

(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE

– PAN adjustment
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
CAUTION
Case I: X-ray tube assembly from an – The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is
external device, possible if the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus software version V02.22.
båÖäáëÜ
System software status – The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e.
V02.22 or higher. the X-ray tube assembly must come from a XGPlus system if it is to be
installed in another XGPlus system

2. Perform a software update to a software status ≥ V02.25.
(
E6 15 05 R
(
E6 15 04 R
page 5-50).
i NOTE

– PAN adjustment
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 85
Case J: New X-ray tube assembly 1. Switch the unit ON.

ORTHOPHOS
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE CAUTION
System software status At this place do not perform any software update to a higher version!
V02.20 or higher. (Important for the configuration!) The tube assembly must first be
brought to the existing system software status.
2. Perform a software update to the overall system software status (automat-

ic update) as described in section 1.9 in order to bring the tube assembly
firstly to the existing system software status.
(
E6 11 07 R
i NOTE
(
approx. 2 s
n
b – d – a.
a b c d
( o
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

båÖäáëÜ
______02_ _________
( n
1 2 3
( n
R
( o

(
E6 15 05 R

12. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the system serial number (see
page 5-50).
i NOTE

– PAN adjustment
6.20

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 87
CAUTION
Case K: X-ray tube assembly from – The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is
external system, possible if the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the
ORTHOPHOS software version V02.20.
XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE) – The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e.
System software status X-ray tube assembly must come from an XG 5 or XG 3- system if it is to
V02.20 or higher. be installed in an XG 5 or XG 3 system
CAUTION
i NOTE
If the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-
leased main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version
can be installed.

(
E6 15 05 R

page 5-50).
i NOTE

i NOTE

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

– PAN adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 89
6.20.4 Check jumper on circuit board DX42

(replacement of board DX42)
From system hardware version BA (November 2006), the DX42 board will
DX42 have two jumpers which are configured through the system hardware version
with or without board DX41.
If board DX42 is supplied as a spare part (from November 2006), the jumpers
will be set to operation without circuit board DX41. If a new DX42 circuit board
(supplied during/after November 2006) is to be inserted in a system with a
system hardware version <BA as a spare part, the jumpers must be reconfig-
ured prior to installation in accordance with the following
steps.
6.20.5 Jumper position on circuit board DX42

Unit operation without DX41
(factory setting from November 2006,
DX41 IN
hardware system version ≥ BA) DX41 IN
Jumper outside
X109 X110
Unit operation with DX41

(factory setting until October 2006,
DX41 IN
DX41 IN
system HW version < BA)
Jumper inside
X109 X110
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 6 6.21 Replacing cables
6.21 Replacing cables
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Switch the unit OFF before you start replacing cables or
removing connectors.
CAUTION
Be careful not to twist the cables or kink the fiber-optic light guides when in-
stalling them.
i NOTE
An overview of all cables can be found in section 1.12.
Always check the cables before replacing them (see section 3-17).
The cables are labeled with small flags. They specify the designation and part
number of the cable.
The plugs and sockets on the cables are designated both on the boards and
cables.Check the designations of the cables when pulling them off.
Some of the cables are marked with green adhesive tape. Mark the corre-
sponding positions on the unit before removing an old cable. Lay the new ca-
ble so that the cable markings again come to rest at the corresponding posi-
tions marked on the unit while removing the old cable.
6.21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 91
6.21 Replacing cables Tabs 6
6.21.1 Laying the cable conduit on the rotating

element
(applicable to cables L3, L5, L6, L11 and L12)
CAUTION
The connectors and cables must be protected by inserting them in the fabric
tube supplied with the cables.
Preparations
z Remove the covers.

z Pull the connectors off of board DX6.
z For L12: Protect the tongue of connector RJ45 by wrapping it with insulat-
ing tape. Make sure that the contacts don't get sticky or stuck together!
z For L3: Remove the connector of the cable with tool W1.
z Pull off the flexible tube and the spiral spring.
z Remove the defective cable and run the new cable up to the rotary ring in
the original position.
z Use insulating tape to fasten the end of the grounding strap to cable L12.
A
1.
2.
W1
1. Bunch the cables together to form a loom. Fasten the defective cable to
the loom and use it as a pull wire to pull the loom through the fabric tube
(A). Pull the fabric tube over the connector and as far over the cable look
as possible.
2. Use the pull wire to pull the fabric tube into the spiral spring.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
3.
Tube assembly side
Sensor side
6.21
3. Slide the flexible tube over the spiral spring. Remove the fabric tube and
the pull wire. Fasten the cable loom or flexible tube, reattach the connec-
tors and refit the covers.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 93
6.21.2 Replacing cable L7 and L8/L108*

(in cable track 2)
Removing cables L7 and L8/L108* from z Switch the unit ON.

board DX1
z Move the slide downward to a pleasant working position using the
UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad/Multipad.
z Switch the unit OFF again.
z Remove the covers (see section 1.14):
– Arm
z Remove the two cross braces and the cover plate of board DX1.
z Pull fiber optic cable L7 and cable L8/L108* off of board DX1.
CAUTION
Immediately after pulling off the cables, wrap the detent of connector X303
(cable L8/L108*) with adhesive tape to protect it against breaking off.
Moving the unit up and removing the z Switch the unit ON.
profile covers
z Move the slide upward using the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad.
z Switch the unit OFF again.
z Remove the covers (see section 1.14):
– Intermediate piece
– Profile covers (top and bottom)
i NOTE
Tip: When unscrewing the upper profile cover, press it against the unit and let
it slide down after detaching it.
ually.
Removing board DX32 z Remove board DX32 (see section 6.1.2).
*) unit HW version ≥ AG
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
1. 2. 3.
båÖäáëÜ
4.
5.
X303
Removing the cable track 1. Detach fiber optic cable L7 and cable L8/L108* from the cable clamps at
the rear of the unit and pull the cables through the slit in the slide toward
the front into the stand.
2. Unscrew the angle brackets on both sides of the cable track.
3. Remove the motor-side end piece from the cable track.
z Remove both cable covers (on the right and on the left in the stand) and
pull the cable track (behind the motor) down and out of the stand.
Detaching old cables from the cable 4. If cable L7 is defective:

track Unscrew cable L7 from the interface board and remove the shielding.
i NOTE
This step is not required if cable L7 is intact and therefore will be reused. Un-
less it is not possible to lay down the cable track flat near the stand (see next
step)
6.21
z Remove the cable ties from the cable track and lay the cable track down
on a flat surface stretched out.
5. Carefully pull both cables (together) out of the cable track and out of the
fabric tube.
CAUTION
At the same time, be sure to check the position of connector X303 on cable
L8/L108* (see photo above).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 95
6. 7. 8.
Drawing new cables into the cable track z If cable L8/L108* is defective:
Wrap the detent of connector X303 on new cable L8/L108* with adhesive
tape to protect it against breaking off.
z Lay the cable track down on a flat surface stretched out.
6. Fasten the two (new) cables together with adhesive tape above the flag la-
bels.
7. Push both cables (together) into the cable track up to the cable markings.
CAUTION
Push the green cable. The white cable is carried along. In this way, you can
prevent the sensitive fiber optic cable from being damaged.
i NOTE
New cables have no cable markings. Orientate yourself according to the mark-
ing on the second (old) cable and make sure that both cables protrude equally
far out of the cable track once they have been drawn in. Then make a mark on
the new cable.
Reinstalling the cable track in the unit 8. Before installing the cable track in the stand, fasten the cables to both
ends of the cable track using cable ties.
CAUTION
The cable ties should only fix the position of the cables. They must not be fas-
tened too tightly, as overtightening them could damage fiber optic cable L7.
z The actual installation of the cable track is performed in the reverse order
of its removal.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
6.21.3 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap

(in cable track 1)
båÖäáëÜ
The procedure for replacing cable L1 and the grounding strap is basically
analogous to the procedure described in chapter 6.21.2.
6.21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 97
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
ORTHOPHOS XG
7 Maintenance
Tab 7
Contents
7.1 Checking the height adjustment ..............................7 – 4
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ..........7 – 6
7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ...........7 – 7
7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder) .......7 – 9
7.5 Checking the light localizers..................................7 – 10
7.6 Checking the X-ray images ...................................7 – 12
7.7 Checking the tube data .........................................7 – 13
7.7.1 kV actual value and radiation time ..................... 7 – 13
7.7.2 Tube current verification..................................... 7 – 13
7.7.3 Fan and temperature.......................................... 7 – 16
7.8 Checking the diaphragm .......................................7 – 17
(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)7 – 17
7.8.2 Diaphragm test exposures ................................. 7 – 18
7.8.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure ............................ 7 – 19
7.8.4 Pan symmetry test exposure.............................. 7 – 22
7.8.5 Ceph – Fixed point of rotation
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)7 – 26
7.8.6 Quickshot test exposure
(XGPlus and full version only) ............................. 7 – 29
7.8.7 TSA sensor
(XGPlus and full version only) ............................. 7 – 32
7.9 Checking the cables for damage...........................7 – 35
7.10 Checking the idling rollers .....................................7 – 36
7.11 Checking the grounding straps .............................7 – 37
7.12 Checking the cable shields ...................................7 – 38
7.13 Checking the protective ground wires ...................7 – 39
7.14 Checking the device leakage current ....................7 – 43
59 38 399 D3352
7–2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7
7 Maintenance
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building
installation before replacing any parts near the power supply, power
switch, board DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!
CAUTION
– Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.
– Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to
– Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
– Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be
taken to check a measurement.
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for
handling boards (ESD).
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity

before touching any boards.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7–3
7.1 Checking the height adjustment Tabs 7
7.1 Checking the height adjustment
Spindle
HA motor
Check the threaded rod and motor for z Perform a visual inspection of the motor and the threaded rod for
abrasion abrasion.
If abrasion clearly has occurred:

Æ Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-6)
Check whether the height adjustment z Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad
produces atypical running noises (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down throughout its entire travel
range.
If the height adjustment is mechanically defective, atypical running noises

may occur:
Speed-dependent hammering noises:

Bearing on the height adjustment motor is damaged
Æ Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-6)
Check whether precise, jolt-free height z Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad
adjustment is possible (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down and watch the movement
of the slide: The slide must begin moving with a soft start and then speed
up its movement.
If precise height positioning with a soft start is not possible:

Æ Lubricate the spindle with a light coat of Chesterton 622
i NOTE
If the X-ray unit is not used for a longer period of time, a slight jolt may occur
the first time it starts moving. However, the next time it starts moving, it must
execute a jolt-free soft start.
59 38 399 D3352
7–4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.1 Checking the height adjustment
Check whether the height adjustment z Manually actuate both limit switches one after the other while the height
limit switches are functioning properly adjustment motor is running: The motor must stop.
båÖäáëÜ
Actuator If the limit switches are not functioning:
Æ Check the corresponding microswitch and replace if necessary
50 Æ Check cable L19, replace if necessary
Limit switch
Check whether an audible signal can be z Run the unit up and down: An audible signal must sound.
heard during height adjustment
If no audible signal sounds:
Æ Replace board DX1 (see Page 6-59)
7.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7–5
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports Tabs 7
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports
Headrest version 1
(will be replaced by headrest version 2 in 2007 and then no longer available as a repair part)
Headrest version 2
(will be available under the part no. 5969741 (from 2007 on))
Check whether the forehead support z Move the forehead support and observe its position.
moves easily and without jolting
throughout its travel range
If the forehead support cannot be positioned easily and without jolting:
Æ Replace the headrest (see section 6.4)
Check whether the temple supports z Move the temple supports and observe their position.
move easily and symmetrically
If the temple supports cannot be positioned symmetrically and without
jolting:
Æ Replace the headrest (see section 6.4).
59 38 399 D3352
7–6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)
7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)
båÖäáëÜ
PAN sensor holder, rigid PAN sensor holder
for operation with TSA sensor
(XGPlus only)
Sensor holder
Pan
Sensor
Sensor holder
Ceph
Sensor
Locking button
7.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7–7
7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) Tabs 7
Check whether the sensor locks and z Carefully insert the sensor upward into the holder:
unlocks easily and is firmly seated in The sensor must snap in place audibly.
the holder z Check the sensor for firm seating.
z Press the locking button and carefully pull the sensor downward out of the
holder: The sensor must be easy to remove.
If the sensor cannot easily be inserted in or removed from the holder, or is

seated too loosely in the holder:
Æ Check the magnets on the sensor for dirt or foreign particles and clean
them or remove any foreign particles if necessary
Æ Replace the sensor holder (see Page 6-43)
Æ Replace the sensor
59 38 399 D3352
7–8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder)
7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder)
båÖäáëÜ
Support piece
Check whether the bite block, contact z Insert the bite block, contact segment and chin rest one after the other in
segment and chin rest can be fitted the bite block holder and check them to make sure they are firmly seated.
securely in the bite block holder
If loosely seated:
Æ Check the bite block, contact segment and/or chin rest for damage; re-
place with new parts if necessary
Æ Replace the support piece (see Page 6-33)
7.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7–9
7.5 Checking the light localizers Tabs 7
7.5 Checking the light localizers
FH light localizer PAN
MS light localizer Light localizer Ceph

PAN
Check whether the FH light localizer z Adjust the FH light localizer on the PAN with slider A.
(PAN) can be adjusted easily
If the light localizer cannot be moved easily:
Æ Lubricate the slider (rail) with a light coat of Vaseline
MS light
localizer
A = FH light
localizer
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.5 Checking the light localizers
Checking the position of the light lines z Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:
(FH and MS) on the PAN – The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally
– The vertical light line (MS) must be running vertically through the cen-
båÖäáëÜ
ter of the forehead support down to the center of the support piece
i NOTE
Tip: When checking and adjusting the light localizers use the following as
reference lines:
For the FH light localizer: Edge of the tube assembly light localizer
FH For the MS light localizer: Support piece, inserted bite block or
Forehead support
If the light beam alignment is not correct:

Æ Adjust the light localizers
(see chapter 6)
MS
29
Checking the position of the light lines z Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:
(FH) on the Ceph Æ The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally between
the temple supports at the height of the ear plugs
i NOTE
Tip: When checking or adjusting the light localizer, you may use a PA or AP
view to assess the light beam on the ear plugs.
60 70 80 90 100 110 120
FH 7.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 11
7.6 Checking the X-ray images Tabs 7
7.6 Checking the X-ray images
Check whether the X-ray images taken z Check to see whether the X-ray images taken by the dentist exhibit an un-
by the dentist are OK exposed border on all 4 sides.
z Check whether the X-ray images show normal definition.
z Check whether the density of the X-ray images is OK.
If the quality of the X-ray images is unsatisfactory in some way:

Æ Check the adjustment and readjust the system if necessary (see sec-
tion 4)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.7 Checking the tube data
7.7 Checking the tube data
7.7.1 kV actual value and radiation time
båÖäáëÜ
z Select service routine S002.3 for the exposure (radiation without rotary
movement, radiation time selectable, see page 5-26) and set the following
parameters:
– Radiation time: 1 s
– kV value: 66 kV
z Release radiation and check the kV actual value and radiation time spec-
trometrically, e.g. using a Mult-O-Meter.
If the measured values deviate from the values set above (1 s, 66 kV) by
more than ± 10 %:
‡ Replace the tube assembly (see Page 6-38)
i NOTE
For the XG 3/3 PPE system version, sensor positioning must be performed un-
til the beam strikes the sensor precisely. If the sensor is positioned correctly,
the corresponding values can be compared with the setpoint values.
7.7.2 Tube current verification
WARNING
The electronics of the X-ray tube assembly are always connected to line volt-
age.
Always switch the X-ray unit off and wait until V203 is no longer illuminated be-
fore contacting the test leads.
WARNING
The test leads and measuring instruments used must have a dielectric
strength of at least 1000V!
Be sure to use a battery-powered measuring instrument with shock-hazard-

protected sockets.
Use only test leads with shock protection.
WARNING
Be sure to switch the X-ray unit off before removing the jumper for the mA
measuring jack.
7.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 13
7.7 Checking the tube data Tabs 7
1. Remove the covers of the tube assembly.
20mADC
2. Remove jumper A from the MA+/MA– measuring points on board DX6.
Connect a digital ammeter to MA+ and MA– and select range 20 mADC.
com.
MA+ MA–
400VDC
A
·
Board DX6
3. Reattach the cover and tighten the screw securely.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.7 Checking the tube data
4. Switch the unit ON å.

Wait 1 min. for self-adjustment of the unit.
Press the R key ç to return the X-ray tube head into the initial position.
båÖäáëÜ
z Select 66 kV/8 mA. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure.
n z As soon as program P1 and 66 kV/8 mA have been selected, the unit is
ready for exposure.
o* XGPlus
o* XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
Measurement 5. Press and hold down the exposure key until a meter reading is obtained.
The ammeter should indicate 8 mA ± 1.6 mA.
Record the display reading.
i NOTE
Display: 1mA corresponds to a tube current of 1mA, permissable tolerance
+/-20%.
If the measured value deviates from the permissible value (1 mA)

by more than ± 20 %:
‡ Replace the tube assembly (see 6-38)
z If the specified value is obtained, switch the unit OFF.

6. Remove the upper cover and
the meter leads.
z Replace jumper!
z Reattach the covers of the tube assembly.
7.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 15
7.7 Checking the tube data Tabs 7
7.7.3 Fan and temperature
Check whether the fan is functioning z Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4
(see Page 5-31)
If the fan is defective:

‡ Replace the fan (see Page 6-42)
Check whether the temperature sensor z Read the temperature in the single tank via service routine S005.5
is supplying plausible values (see page 5-33)
If the displayed temperature reading is not plausible:

‡ Replace the tube assembly (see Page 6-38)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.8 Checking the diaphragm
7.8 Checking the diaphragm
båÖäáëÜ
(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)
z Check the fixed diaphragm for completeness.

z Then release the diaphragm test exposures
(see page 7-18ff.).
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 17
7.8 Checking the diaphragm Tabs 7
7.8.2 Diaphragm test exposures

The diaphragm test exposures are used for a quick check of the system
adjustment. The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started without a service pass-
word. Diaphragm test exposures can thus be performed by the user as well.
Menu: Test exposure
The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started from SIDEXIS XG:

EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST ‡ XCXP ‡ SELECT X-RAY DEVICE ‡ SERVICE EXPO-
SURE ‡ DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE
i NOTE
When you open the TEST EXPOSURE menu, the unit switches from the user
mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.
In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad
are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine.
General control of the unit (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.
You can switch between the PAN - DIAPHRAGM, PAN - SYMMETRY, CEPH -
FIXED POINT OF ROTATION and TSA - SENSOR menus by clicking the
corresponding tab with the mouse. To quit the TEST EXPOSURE menu, click
CANCEL.
i NOTE
The Ceph - Fixed point of rotation and TSA - Sensor tabs are not present in the
XG 3/3 PPE system version.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
7.8.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Test exposure ‡ Pan diaphragm
i NOTE
The exposure is performed without a needle phantom.
Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Select the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 19
SIDEXIS screen The exposure dialog box showing the exposure status appears in
SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S030.2 and its specific exposure
parameters are displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B

(A).
i NOTE
(see chapter 4)
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 21
7.8.4 Pan symmetry test exposure
Menu: Test exposure ‡ Pan diaphragm
Preparations z Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
CAUTION
It is essential that the needle phantom is removed from bite block holder of the
panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the
Opening PAN - SYMMETRY 1. Select the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
SIDEXIS.
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3

R
XGPlus:
XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 23
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
S2
Adjustment: not ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
± 0.75 mm is permissible (A).
– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm.
(B).
i NOTE
If one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be adjusted.
(see chapter 4)
z Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 25
7.8.5 Ceph – Fixed point of rotation

(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Test exposure ‡ Ceph - Fixed point of rotation
CAUTION
Opening CEPH - FIXED POINT OF 1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
ROTATION
i NOTE
The QUICKSHOT check box must not be selected.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
SIDEXIS.
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3
R
XGPlus:
XG5:
dialog box.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 27
A B

(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-
justed (see chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
7.8.6 Quickshot test exposure

(XGPlus and full version only)
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Test exposure ‡ Ceph - Quickshot
CAUTION
Opening CEPH - FIXED POINT OF 1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
ROTATION
Opening QUICKSHOT 2. Activate the QUICKSHOT check box.

7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 29
SIDEXIS.
1 - 80 kV/14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8
R
WAIT!
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
A B

in the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary
lines (A).
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot must be adjusted (see
chapter 4).
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 31
7.8.7 TSA sensor

(XGPlus and full version only)
Menu: Test exposure ‡ TSA sensor
i NOTE
The exposure is performed without a needle phantom.
Opening TSA - SENSOR 1. Select the TSA - SENSOR submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
SIDEXIS.
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 60 kV/3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4
R
WAIT!
dialog box.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 33
A B

image field (A).
(A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted (see
chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.9 Checking the cables for damage
7.9 Checking the cables for damage
Check whether the cables feeding the z Perform a visual check of the power cable, protective ground wire, control
båÖäáëÜ
unit are OK cables and data cables.
If cables are externally damaged:

‡ Replace the respective cables (see Page 6-91)
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 35
7.10 Checking the idling rollers Tabs 7
7.10 Checking the idling rollers
Idling roller
Check whether the idling rollers are OK z Rotate ring B by hand and check it for smooth and easy running.
If the ring does not run smoothly and easily:

Æ Remove the housing covers and check the idle rollers for dirt and for-
eign particles. Clean and remove foreign particles if necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.11 Checking the grounding straps
7.11 Checking the grounding straps
Check whether the grounding straps

have complete and firm contact
z Perform a visual and “hands-on” inspection of the ground straps to ensure
that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.
båÖäáëÜ
If the grounding straps do not have proper contact:
‡ Fasten them properly
If the grounding straps are damaged:

‡ Replace the grounding straps
7.11
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 37
7.12 Checking the cable shields Tabs 7
7.12 Checking the cable shields
Shield on the tube assembly
Shield on housing DX32
Check whether the cable shielding is z Perform a visual and “hands-on” inspection of the cable shields to ensure
OK that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.
If the cable shields do not have proper contact:

‡ Fasten them properly
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.13 Checking the protective ground wires
7.13 Checking the protective ground wires
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
z Switch OFF the line voltage at the main switch of the building installation.
z Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from
the building installation.
z Remove the following cover parts (see section 1.14):
– Profile cover (10)
– Tube assembly cover, front (65)
– Tube assembly cover, rear (70)
Measuring setup for protective ground wire test
A ~ A
Measuring point
Ammeter Power source Central ground wire
Voltmeter
V
Measuring points B-E
B
C
D
E 7.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 39
7.13 Checking the protective ground wires Tabs 7
Check whether the ground wire z A power source with a current of at least 0.2 A and a no-load voltage of 24
resistance complies with the V max. and 4 V min. is required.
specifications z Connect the power source between the measuring points specified in the
table for at least 5 s and measure:
– the voltage drop with the voltmeter
Protective ground wire test
between... – the current with the ammeter and
– calculate the resistance using the formula R = U/I
A and B GNYE wire 0,1Ω
A and C 2. Protective 0,1Ω
ground wire
A and D Housing DX32 0,2Ω
Measuring point A: Central ground wire
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.13 Checking the protective ground wires
Measuring points B and C:

GNYE power connection and 2nd ground wire
båÖäáëÜ
B B C B C
A
PE
Power cable
Orthophos XG
Protective ground wire
Protective ground wire

Second protective
to the Orthophos XG
to the Orthophos XG
ground wire
Power cable
C Power cable
Second
Second
7.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 41
7.13 Checking the protective ground wires Tabs 7
Measuring points D and E: Board cage DX32 and tube assembly
Board
cage
DX32 Tube assembly
D
housing
i NOTE
If the resistance exceeds the value specified in the adjacent table, check
whether the protective ground wire is fastened according to specifications:
– Check whether the flat washer, toothed lock washer and cable lug are
fitted on the protective ground wire in the right order (see page 7-40)
and whether the nuts of the ground wire connections are tightened securely.
If the ground wire is not fastened according to specifications, fasten the

ground wire properly.(see page 7-40).
Do not connect the power cable and the second ground wire to the build-
ing installation yet, but perform a measurement of the device leakage
current first (see section 7.14).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.14 Checking the device leakage current
7.14 Checking the device leakage current
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
i NOTE
A high resistance measuring voltage source at line frequency and a measur-
ing circuit compliant with the requirements of IEC 601 are required.
Complete test units, e.g. the "Bender tester", fulfill these requirements.
If you have not done it already...

z Switch OFF the line voltage at the main switch of the building installation.
z Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from
the building installation.
z Remove the following cover parts (see section 1.14):
– Profile cover (10)
7.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 43
7.14 Checking the device leakage current Tabs 7
Measuring setup for testing the device leakage current
L B
N
PE Voltage source
Power cable 208 V / 230 V
± 10%
to the Orthophos XG
~
A MD
1kΩ
0.015μF
10kΩ
Voltmeter
z Check whether the power switch of the unit is turned ON.

z Connect a high-resistance measuring voltage source between the short-
circuited power cable (B) and ground wire A.
z Measure the voltage drop across MD.
i NOTE
The measured value must not exceed 5 mA.
If the leakage current is not OK, perform troubleshooting according to section

3.6.
z Reconnect the unit to the building installation (see the Installation Instruc-
tions for the ORTHOPHOS XG).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
Tab 7 7.14 Checking the device leakage current
båÖäáëÜ
7.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 45
Service Manual History D3352
Version 1: Software version V02.17,

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus/Ceph and not yet all errors and service routines described.
Version 2: Software versions V02.18.1 (XG 5) and V02.19 (XGPlus), system version XG 5,
complete revision.
Version 3: Software version V02.20, service routine S034.7,
error messages added, chapter update added, additional general revision
Version 4: Software version V02.22, TSA, service routines S017.12/13/14 and S020,
chapter update added, additional general revision
Version 5: Software version V02.24, system version XG 3, Ceph right-hand arm,
service routines S017.15 and S021.3, chapter update added, additional general
revision
Version 6: Software version V02.25
Version 7: Software version V02.27; new service routines S005.7, S007.5, S012.2/3/4, S017.9
S018.5/6, S032.10 and S033.10, optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter added
(CAN bus diagnosis, sensor data path), additional general revision
Version 8 Software version V02.28; system hardware version BA, DX41 omitted, new headrest; new
fixed diaphragm; XG 3 PPE "pay per exposure" concept (USA only);
new service routines S014, S015, S017.10, S017.22 and S017.23,
optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter extended, additional general
revision
Version 9 Software version V02.28.1
Version 10 Software version V02.30
Version 11 Software version V02.31
Version 12 Chapter 6 "Repair", sections "Replacing the light barriers" and "Replacing cables in the
cable tracks" changed and corrections in Chapter 3 "Troubleshooting".
Version 13 General: Software version V02.32, Chapter 2: Error message E6 61 70 added, Chapter 5:
Service routine S017.17, Chapter 6: Section "Replacing the tube bend" omitted, Section
"Measures following replacement of boards" changed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
båÖäáëÜ
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008
tÉ=êÉëÉêîÉ=íÜÉ=êáÖÜí=íç=ã~âÉ=~åó=~äíÉê~íáçåë=ïÜáÅÜ=ã~ó=ÄÉ=êÉèìáêÉÇ=ÇìÉ=íç=íÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=áãéêçîÉãÉåíëK
«=páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=OMMQ péê~ÅÜÉW=ÉåÖäáëÅÜ= mêáåíÉÇ=áå=dÉêã~åó

aPPROKMTSKMNKNPKMO===MTKOMMU ûKJkêKW= NNM=N40 fãéêáã¨=Éå=^ääÉã~ÖåÉ
páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=
áå=íÜÉ=rp^W
c~Äêáâëíê~≈É=PN páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=ii`
aJSQSOR=_ÉåëÜÉáã QUPR=páêçå~=aêáîÉI=pìáíÉ=NMM lêÇÉê=kç RV=PU=PVV=aPPRO
dÉêã~åó `Ü~êäçííÉI=k`=OUOTP
ïïïKëáêçå~KÇÉ rp^

Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

loqelmelp=udmäìë=ap=L=`ÉéÜ

• This Service Manual is valid for the following unit versions:

In addition, you also require:

• Spare parts list: Order No. 59 38 423

• Wiring diagrams: Order No. 59 38 332

1 General information ..................................................................... 1-5

2 Messages .................................................................................... 2-3

3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3-3

4 Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-3

5 Service routines ........................................................................... 5-9

6 Repair .......................................................................................... 6-5

7 Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-3

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes ..........1 – 6

1.3 Programs and functions of the

1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class1 – 9

1.5 Operation notes.....................................................1 – 11

1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release1 – 13

1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ...............1 – 15

1.8 List of software versions........................................1 – 16

1.9 Software update ....................................................1 – 22

1.10 Selecting More details ...........................................1 – 32

1.11 The most important modules and components .....1 – 34

1.12 Cabling overview ...................................................1 – 38

1.13 Illustrations of boards ............................................1 – 42

1.14 Removing the covers.............................................1 – 50

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes

Remote control operation is possible in all system versions.

1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system

Basic class (Multipad, basic equipment, remote release optional)

with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XG 5

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

1.3 Programs and functions of the

1.3.1 XG 5 system version

8 panoramic programs z P 1, P 1C, P 10

5 Ceph programs z C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4

Functions z Half-views of right/left side possible only with P1

1.3.2 XG 3 system version

Functions z Half-views of right/left side possible only with P1

1.3.3 XG 3 PPE (pay per exposure) system version

1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system

1.4.1 Programs and functions of the basic version

10 panoramic programs z P 1, P 1C, P 2, P 10

5 Ceph programs z C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4

Functions z Half-views of right/left side possible only with P1

1.4.2 Programs and functions of the full version

Additional Pan programs z Constant magnification factor of 1.25 P 2C, P 10C

Additional functions z Selectable right/left partial view and individual quadrants

1.5 Operation notes

Remote control The system can be equipped with...

Turn-off time The turn-off time must amount to at least 60s.

Reattach the covers.

A pulse/pause ratio of 1:20 is better for the X-ray tube.

1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation

1.6.1 Switching the demo mode ON

1 2 3 5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the

( info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the info screen (XGPlus).

Info screen for XGPlus 3. Set dip switch S2 (DX6) to position 1.

Orthophos XG configuration 2/2

1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport

Cephalometer z Start service routine S034, test step 6.

1.8 List of software versions

1.8.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Remote control Remarks

Sidexis XG Remarks Database

Motors M1, M2 Linear movement of headrest